JP6572982B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional game machine, symbols are displayed on the display device in a variable manner, and symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. Further, there is for the display device, some are also allowed to display various images such as a character or a landscape in addition to the symbol.

JP 2003-325886 A

However, in the conventional gaming machines, there is a possibility to set a good optimal display content she can such Kuna'.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can be set to a suitable display.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a display capable of displaying means identification information, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, first defined the Oite the identification information in advance on the display means A privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on dynamic display means for dynamically displaying in a mode and specific identification information predetermined in the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped and displayed a game execution unit state, and are not provided with, on the basis of the establishment of the predetermined specific conditions, the dynamic display of the identification information and Viewing control means Ru is displayed on the display means different specific display , a stop display means Ru is displayed stop the identification information in a dynamic display of the identification information by said dynamic display means, at least a portion between the specific display of dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information Included in the display period A dynamic display mode in the dynamic display of the identification information that is started based on the establishment of the predetermined condition when it is determined when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the specific period overlaps, A second mode in which the specific display is easier to visually recognize than when identification information is displayed, and a display range of the specific display is wider than the second mode, and the identification information is displayed in the first mode. and configurable mode setting means into a plurality of first aspect comprising at least a third aspect easily the specific display is visible than, Ru comprising a.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the display means is disposed at a position visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the display unit capable of displaying the identification information, and the operation for dynamically displaying the identification information in the predetermined first mode on the display unit based on establishment of a predetermined condition. And a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player based on the fact that specific identification information predetermined in the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed. Display control means for causing the display means to display a specific display different from the dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, and the display of the identification information by the dynamic display means. The stop display means for stopping and displaying the identification information in the dynamic display, and at least a part of the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information and the specific period included in the display period of the specific display overlap. Then, when it is determined when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the dynamic display mode in the dynamic display of the identification information that is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is displayed, and the identification information is displayed in the first mode. The second mode in which the specific display is easier to visually recognize than the case where the specific display is displayed, and the display range of the specific display is wider than the second mode, and the specific information is displayed more than the case where the identification information is displayed in the first mode. And a mode setting unit that can be set to one mode among a plurality of modes including at least a third mode that makes the display easy to visually recognize.

Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to set a good optimal display.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen when it becomes 5 seconds before the time effect starts during the variation display of the 3rd symbol, and (b) is the variation display of the 3rd symbol. It is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen when it becomes the start timing of a time production inside. (A) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen when it becomes 5 seconds before the time effect starts during the fixed display of the 3rd symbol, (b) is the fixed display of the 3rd symbol It is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen when it becomes the start timing of a time production inside. It is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen at the time of 5 seconds before the time production starts during the demonstration production. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production in time production. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production in time production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the fluctuation | variation pattern table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the time production table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of RTC. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the data table storage area typically. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the elapsed time confirmation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control treatment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the back surface image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fixed display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the demonstration display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen when it becomes 5 seconds before the time effect starts during the fixed display of the 3rd design in the 2nd embodiment, (b) In 2nd Embodiment, it is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen when it becomes a start timing of a time effect during the fixed display of the 3rd symbol. It is the flowchart which showed the back surface image change command process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the data table storage area in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the stop display selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the background image change command process 3 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fixed display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. Note that the inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 10) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 228 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 228 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start prize), which will be described later, are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 228 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 228 is operated, the “city stage” → “empty stage” "→" Island Stage "→" City Stage "→ ... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 228 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 10) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and when the ball passes the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first 2 designs) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, Is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, after the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37 and a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds to 30 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is held is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started. In addition, the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a lot of balls also enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first entrance 64, and as a result, a special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the fluctuation display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. And is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, there are two types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”.

  When the “big hit A” and the “big hit B” are reached, a special game state (16R jackpot) with 16 rounds is set. Furthermore, in “Big Jack A”, as an added value after the jackpot ends, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special symbol high probability state (during special symbol change) after the jackpot ends, and the normal symbol hit probability increases. To do. The high probability state of the special symbol and the state where the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased continues until at least the next special symbol jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of “big hit B”, as a value added after the big hit, the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases from the end of the big hit until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” means a state where the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol change), in other words, the special gaming state (16R jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during short-time. .

  After that, after the special symbol jackpot ends, the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol, that is, from the end of the “jackpot A” until the next special symbol jackpot Is called the probable change period of the special symbol. Further, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a normal symbol short time period.

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in this embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is common, and whether or not it becomes a `` special symbol high probability state '' according to the jackpot type It is different. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the jackpot type. Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot may be changed. Further, instead of changing the period of time when the “ordinary symbol is in a short time state”, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 or the time of one ordinary symbol It is good also as what changes the frequency | count of releasing an object. Further, in this embodiment, after the “big hit A” ends, the “special symbol high probability state” is reached until the next special symbol big hit. You may comprise so that it may become "a high probability state of a special symbol" only until it complete | finishes 100 times. In addition, 100 times is an illustration to the last, and the lottery number of special symbols may be determined arbitrarily.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the jackpot type is “big hit B”, the short time state of the normal symbol is continued from the end of the “big hit B” until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. The period may be arbitrarily determined. For example, when the jackpot type is “big jackpot B”, the normal symbol time-saving state may be continued after the “big jackpot B” ends until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, when “Big Bonus B” is reached and the “Normal Symbol Normal State” shifts to “Normal Symbol Time Short State”, the state is maintained after the special symbol jackpot ends and the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. Will continue. On the other hand, after the special symbol jackpot is reached, if the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the 100 special symbol lotteries, the game returns to the “normal state of the normal symbol”.

  Then, if the “big hit B” is newly reached while the “normal symbol short-time state” continues, the “normal symbol short-time state” is further increased by 100 times after the end of the new “big hit B”. This will continue until the special symbol lottery ends. For example, after becoming “big hit B” and moving to “normal symbol short-time state”, when the “special symbol short-time state” is reached in the 10th special symbol lottery, ”Is continued until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times after the end.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 10) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “Large A”, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which “1, 3, 5, 7, 9”, which is an odd number, are added are aligned. Further, if “big hit B”, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added are arranged. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or longer), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) It is possible to suppress overlooking. Also, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

  Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stopping display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest balls in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect (see FIG. 7) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Despite the player firing a ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), there is rarely a situation in which there is no ball entering the first ball slot 64, and the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state. In many cases, the played state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has left the game and no game is played by the pachinko machine 10 at all. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new entrance is executed. Is done.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 9, a time effect that is one of effects performed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This time effect is an effect that is executed according to the elapsed time since the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10, and is different from the effect that is normally executed (see FIG. 4B). The production is executed. This time effect is performed every hour and continues for 3 minutes. Since only three minutes of one hour are executed, the player can feel novelty by executing the time effect. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In addition, since the time production is configured to be executed at predetermined intervals (every hour), the player can play a game aiming at the execution period of the time production, It is possible to make the player who wants to quit the game want to enjoy the time effect by continuing the game until the next time effect is finished. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Although details will be described later, the elapsed time after the power is turned on is determined based on time information measured by the RTC 292 (see FIG. 10) electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. Is done.

  FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a case where the number of reserved balls is three and the start timing of the time effect is displayed during the variation display of the third symbol. FIG. 5A is a diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 five seconds before the time effect starts. As shown in FIG. 5A, when 5 seconds before the time effect starts, the characters “5 seconds before the contact time” are displayed in the small area Ds3. This “contact time” means the time effect described above, and the effect is as if the player is actually touching the dog character 740 displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is named “Fureai time”. By this display, it is possible to notify the player that it is 5 seconds before the time effect starts. In addition, among the characters displayed in the small area Ds3, the content of the number of seconds is changed according to the elapsed time. For example, if it is 3 seconds before the time effect is started, the characters “3 seconds before the contact time” are displayed in the small area Ds3.

  In the small area Ds1 (see FIG. 5A), three reserved ball number symbols are displayed. Depending on the number of reserved balls, the player can easily recognize that the current number of held balls is three. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, the changing third symbol is displayed in a translucent manner in the main display area Dm. That is, the back image displayed on the back of the third symbol is displayed in a manner that the player can clearly see. In this way, the variation effect of the third symbol is displayed in a translucent manner by displaying the third symbol superimposed on the front side of the display (notification image 750) for notifying the start of the time effect, This is for preventing (suppressing) that the notification image 750 is difficult to see (that is, the notification image 750 is blocked by the third symbol).

  In addition, although mentioned later for details, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is comprised so that the display aspect of the 3rd symbol's change production may be varied based on the start timing of a time production. Then, the changing third symbol is displayed in a translucent manner only when the third symbol is in a changing state during the display period of the notification image 750. For example, when it is determined that only the stop display period of the third symbol after the end of the change overlaps the display period of the notification image 750, the change effect of the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the lower right of the main display area Dm. Thus, the third design is configured to suppress the notification image 750 from being shielded.

  FIG. 5B is a diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 at the start timing of the time effect. As shown in FIG. 5 (b), when the start timing of the time effect is reached, a character (this book) that is different from the character 710 (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) displayed in the normal time in the small area Ds2. In the embodiment, a dog character 740) is displayed. Thereby, it can be made to recognize that an effect different from usual is performed with respect to a player. In addition, the characters displayed in the small area Ds3 are updated to the characters “contact time 0 seconds ago”, and the characters “contact time rush!” Are displayed in the main display area Dm. Thereby, it can be made to recognize easily that it was the execution period (contact time) of the time production with respect to the player.

  Furthermore, since the changing 3rd symbol is displayed in a semi-transparent manner in the main display area Dm, the character “contact time rush!” Displayed to notify the start of the time effect is displayed on the player. Can be clearly seen. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize the start of the time effect more reliably.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, display contents when the time effect start timing is reached in a state where the third symbol is displayed in a fixed manner will be described. In addition, the fixed display means that the fluctuating effect is finished, there is no reserved ball when the stop display period (1 second) of the third symbol has elapsed, and there is no ball entering the first ball slot 64. It is an effect executed in the case. Specifically, it refers to the display content that continues to display the third symbol stopped and displayed for 1 second in the main display area Dm.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a case where it is 5 seconds before the time effect is started in a state in which the third symbol is fixedly displayed. As shown in FIG. 6A, in a state where the third symbol is fixedly displayed, the third symbol is stationary in the main display area Dm. In the example of FIG. 6 (a), when the third symbols having the numbers “2”, “5”, and “7” attached to the active lines L1 of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are stopped. Is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, in the state in which the third symbol is fixedly displayed, most of the back image is shielded by the third symbol. That is, it becomes difficult for the player to see the back image. Even if the notification image 750 is displayed in the main display area Dm in this state, most of the notification image 750 is shielded by the third symbol, and the player may miss the start of the time effect. As described above, the time effect is a special effect that is displayed only for a limited period (3 minutes in one hour), so that the player can play the game with the pachinko machine 10 looking forward to the time effect. Can do. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player quits the game without noticing the notification image 750 even though the time effect is started. Further, if the player who originally played the game notices the time production after the player quits the game without noticing the start of the time production and another player starts the game with the pachinko machine 10, There is a risk of dissatisfaction with the player who was playing the game.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the timing of starting the time effect is reached, the display of the start of the time effect is performed after the third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is deleted (the notification image 750 is displayed). It is structured as follows. As a result, as shown in FIG. 6B, the characters “contact time rush!” Are displayed in the main display area Dm without being blocked. Therefore, the player can be surely recognized that the time production start timing has come. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing the notification image 750, so that the game during the time effect can be surely enjoyed.

  In addition, if it is configured not to display the final display effect simply (that is, after the third symbol is stopped and displayed for one second and then erased), the player may miss the third symbol that was previously stopped and displayed. . Since the third symbol displayed in a stopped state shows the result of drawing the special symbol, if the third symbol is configured to be easily overlooked, the player may feel dissatisfied with the pachinko machine 10. In general, a player plays a game with the pachinko machine 10 for the purpose of winning a jackpot, so if it becomes difficult to check whether or not it is a big hit, the game will be lost.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the third symbol is fixedly displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) when one second or more has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed in normal times. Only when the notification image 750 is displayed during the fixed display, the third symbol in the fixed display is erased. That is, the notification image 750 is displayed in preference to the third symbol only when the time effect that is a characteristic effect in the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. As a result, the time effect can be clearly displayed during the time effect while making it difficult to overlook the stop symbol of the third symbol during the normal time.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a case where the time effect is started 5 seconds before the demonstration effect. In the demonstration effect of the present embodiment, a boy character 760 with a bee that is normally displayed in the small area Ds2 is displayed on the entire third symbol display device 81, and the model name is “Pachinko machine 10”. The character 770 is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm. Note that the image displayed during the demonstration effect is not limited to this, and the name of the manufacturer who developed the pachinko machine 10, the character image displayed during the time effect, or the like may be displayed. By executing this demonstration effect, it is possible to easily recognize that no game is played in the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when it is 5 seconds before the time effect during the demonstration effect, a character “720 seconds before contact time” is displayed 720 in the small area Ds3. The number of seconds of this character 720 is counted down until the time effect is started. And when it becomes the start timing of the time effect with the demonstration effect, the dog character 740 is displayed in the small area Ds2 in the same manner as the start timing of the time effect during the fixed display of the third symbol, A character 720 “contact time 0 seconds ago” is displayed in the small area Ds3, and a character “contact time rushed!” Is displayed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6B). In other words, the demonstration effect image (a boy character 760 with a bee and a character 770 for displaying the model name) that is normally executed is not displayed. Even if it is the execution period of the time effect, if the image of the demonstration effect that is normally displayed is kept displayed, it becomes difficult to determine whether the time effect has been started from the display content. End up. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the demonstration effect image is deleted at the start of the time effect, the notification image 750 can be displayed without being blocked by the demonstration effect image. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize the timing at which the game is started for the player who has been waiting for the timing to start the game after the time effect.

  Next, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the time effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. As described above, this time effect is a special effect that is executed for 3 minutes every hour. During this time effect, effects in which the dog character 740 performs various actions are executed. When the time effect is started and the display period (5 seconds) of the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) ends, the display mode is switched to that shown in FIG. That is, the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is displayed is reduced and displayed in the small display area 780 in the lower right part of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the change effect and the fixed display effect are displayed in the small display area 780). The dog character 740 is displayed in the other area. Further, the remaining time until the time effect ends is displayed in the upper right part of the third symbol display device 81. Here, after the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is displayed for 5 seconds, the display mode is switched to the display mode shown in FIG. 8A, so the remaining time is displayed from 2 minutes 55 seconds to 0 seconds. Updated in the range of minutes 00 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, when the time effect is started, the dog character 740 is displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. As an operation performed by the dog character 740, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, the dog character 740 approaches the front side of the front view and looks at the player. As shown in FIG. 9, an effect that the dog character 740 is delighted by stroking its head, an effect that the dog character 740 lies down as shown in FIG.

  Thus, by displaying effects in which the lovely dog character 740 performs various actions, it is possible to give the player a feeling of healing, a good feeling, and the like. That is, it is possible to make the user feel that the dog character 740 is desired to be seen for a longer time. Therefore, even after 3 minutes, which is the presentation period of the time effect, have passed, the game can be continued until the next time effect by making the user want to see various operations of the dog character 740 again. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. Further, by limiting the effect in which the dog character 740 appears to 3 minutes out of 1 hour, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting bored with the time effect. Therefore, since the player can enjoy the production during the time production more, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect of the time effect is not limited to the aspect of the present embodiment, and the content of the effect may be arbitrarily determined as long as the effect is executed in a special aspect different from the normal time. Good. For example, the display mode of the third symbol may be changed instead of the character. Moreover, you may comprise so that an audio | voice effect and a lamp | ramp effect different from normal may be performed as a time effect. Furthermore, as a time effect, it may be configured such that a special effect different from the case where the jackpot is made during normal times is performed by winning a jackpot during the time effect period.

  In the present embodiment, the final display effect is configured to be reduced and displayed in the small display area 780 in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 during the time effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, you may comprise so that a fixed display effect may not be displayed during a time effect. That is, the third design may be erased after the variation effect is finished and the third design is stopped and displayed for one second. Then, it may be configured to display an image at the time effect on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 including the small display area 780. Thereby, the display area of the time effect can be expanded until the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the variation effect is started, so that the degree of freedom of the effect contents can be further increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy the time effect that is a characteristic effect in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. Further, for the same reason, the demonstration effect may not be displayed during the time effect.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating, by a lighting state, whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the second entrance 67, As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Fluctuation display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. The Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st entrance 64, but is limited to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (16 rounds of big hit) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 10). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, and a second per-random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a jackpot determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first per-random number counter C1, but the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning is one of the determination values defined in the first per-random number table 202a. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 11B) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is assigned to each big hit type. It is defined in association. Specifically, the jackpot A is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49” (see 202b1 in FIG. 11B). Further, a jackpot B is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99” (see 202b2 in FIG. 11B). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 11C) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 11C). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 11C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired based on the passing of the ball through the normal entrance 67 and the second per random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol It is determined whether or not it is a win.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation pattern display mode is defined for each display mode. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 31). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance slot. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 31).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by a first random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is When the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). The period is a high probability state of symbols) and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The first per-random number table (not shown) for the special symbol with a high probability and the first per-random number table (not shown) for the special symbol with a low probability are stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per-random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “7” is the first per-random number table 202a for the low probability time. Stored in In this way, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/300”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 10 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 218, 249, 270” are It is stored in the first per random number table 202a for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/30”.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value that is a jackpot stored in the first per-random number table for the low probability time, and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the first per-random number table for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers for each jackpot are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. Thus, since it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 11B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is “0 to 49” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that three types of hits (big hit A and big hit B) are determined based on the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is as described above according to the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 11B). Is set.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 31) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It has been.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, as a variation pattern for detachment, “completely detach” with a variation time of 8 seconds, “disconnection short reach” with a variation time of 15 seconds, and “displacement long reach” with a variation time of 20 seconds. ”Is defined as“ outgoing super reach ”with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds. As a fluctuation pattern shared by jackpot A and jackpot B,“ hit short reach ”with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds and“ per long reach with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds ” "" Super-reach "with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). Note that the types of variation patterns are not limited to these, and a common variation pattern may be provided for jackpot and loss. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the jackpot type from the mode of the variation pattern, so that the variation pattern result can be watched more interestingly. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. Further, a variation pattern dedicated to jackpot A that is most advantageous for the player may be provided. Thereby, the player who recognizes that the variation pattern is exclusively for jackpot A can recognize that it is jackpot A before the third symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 11C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit when it matches the value of the random number set in the second hit random number table 202c. Further, the second random number table 202c is used for a normal symbol at a low probability (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and at a high probability (ordinary symbol) at which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than the low probability. And the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the normal symbol having a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “only twice per second” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 31).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 31), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 30) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 29) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag. 203e and an hour / medium counter 203f.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter C1. Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the start winning, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. They are added (see S404 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 24).

  The value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 24 and S405 in FIG. 26). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero. Each time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 27).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It is not performed (S603 in FIG. 28: No).

  The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability variation flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is Indicates that the special symbol is in a probable state. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203e is in an off state, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). This probability variation flag 203e is set to off every time the “big hit A” end timing is set to off in the initial state. On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203e is turned off every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off or the start of a big hit is set.

  When the special symbol change start process (see FIG. 25) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability variation flag 203e is referred to. If the state is ON, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per-random number table for high probability. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203e is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 25).

  The hour / minute counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203f is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, and every time the jackpot is B, the value is set to 100. That is, when the “big hit B” is reached, a new value of 100 is set regardless of the value of the hour / minute counter 203f (see S1013 in FIG. 32). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is finished until the value of the hour / short counter 203f becomes 0 (S215 in FIG. 24).

  When the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the hour and middle counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second random number table for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / medium counter 203f is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second per-random number table for low probability (see S510 and S511 in FIG. 22).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 29) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and variable effects (variation Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 228, RTC 292, and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 228, and when the player operates the frame button 228, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern table 222a and a time effect table 222b.

  The variation pattern table 222a is referred to in order to select a detailed aspect of the variation effect (variation display) based on the rough variation effect (variation display) aspect notified by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. It is a table. A display variation pattern command is set based on the variation effect mode selected from the variation pattern table 222a (see S1704 in FIG. 39).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the time is measured (measured) by the RTC 292. Then, based on the time information (time information) of the RTC 292, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a time effect every certain time (for example, one hour). In the variation pattern table 222a of the present embodiment, different types of variation effects are defined according to time-related conditions such as whether or not a time effect is being performed.

  Details of the variation pattern table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the variation pattern table 222a. As shown in FIG. 13, in the variation pattern table 222a, detailed modes of selectable variation patterns (variation effects) are defined for each variation display mode (variation type) notified from the main controller 110. Yes. Moreover, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the aspect of the change pattern which can be selected changes according to the remaining period t until a time effect starts. That is, a variation effect mode is defined so as not to cover the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) in association with the value of the remaining time t.

  Specifically, for example, when the variation type notified by the variation pattern command is completely out of order and the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is 9 seconds or more (that is, 8 seconds) When the variation display corresponding to the complete detachment is finished and the time effect is not started until the third graphic is stopped and displayed for 1 second), the variation effect of the normal mode corresponding to the complete detachment (FIG. 4 (b) )) Is selected (see 222a1 in FIG. 13). This is because the start time of the time effect and the fluctuation period do not overlap, so there is no need to reduce or transmit the third symbol.

  In addition, when the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is 2 seconds or more and less than 9 seconds (that is, the period of 5 seconds during which the notification image 750 is displayed and the third symbol is In the case where there is an overlap with the one second that is stopped and displayed), the variation effect of the mode in which the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right part of the third symbol display device 81 and is variably displayed is selected (see 222a2 in FIG. 13). ). As a result, the fluctuating effect can be displayed without blocking the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B). Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the time effect has been started while displaying the lottery result of the special symbol.

  In addition, when the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds (that is, the period of 5 seconds during which the notification image 750 is displayed is the third pattern. When overlapping with the variable display period), the changing third symbol is displayed in a translucent manner (see 222a3 in FIG. 13). That is, the variable display is executed in the manner shown in FIG. By variably displaying the third symbol in a translucent manner, it is possible to suppress the disappearance of the characters “contact time rush!” Displayed during the variation display. Therefore, the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) can be clearly recognized by the player.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to display the third symbol as usual (not in a semi-transparent manner) for 1 second after the start of change and for 1 second before the stop of change. This is because if the third symbol is made translucent in all periods from the start of change to the stop of change, the player may not be able to recognize that the change display has started or that the change display has ended. is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the variation starts, the variation rate of the third symbol is increased, and the third symbol is made translucent from 1 second after the variation rate of the symbol becomes sufficiently high. . In addition, the display mode of the third symbol is returned to the normal mode (non-translucent mode) for one second before the end of the variation, and the variation rate of the third symbol is decreased. This makes it possible for the player to reliably recognize the start of variation and the end of variation. In addition, since the 3rd symbol is in a translucent mode while the variation rate of the 3rd symbol is high (that is, it is difficult to visually recognize the 3rd symbol), the 3rd symbol becomes translucent. This can be made difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by switching the display mode of the third symbol.

  If the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is less than 1 second, or if the time effect is already in effect, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right part of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the variation effect of the mode of variation display is selected (see 222a4 in FIG. 13). Thereby, it can suppress that the motion of the notification image 750 (refer FIG.6 (b)) and the operation | movement of the dog character 740 displayed during a time effect is interrupted by the fluctuation | variation display of a 3rd symbol.

  Even when the variation type is out of the short reach, the variation effect mode is selected according to the remaining time (t) until the time effect is started. That is, when the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is 16 seconds or more and the time effect is not started during the variable display corresponding to the out-of-range short reach, the third pattern is displayed in the normal display mode. Is selected (see 222a5 in FIG. 13).

  Further, when the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is 2 seconds or more and less than 16 seconds, a period of 5 seconds in which the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is displayed. And the one second in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed overlap, so that the variation effect is selected in such a manner that the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 3). 13 (see 222a6).

  Further, when the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds (that is, 5 seconds when the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is displayed. Is displayed in a semi-transparent manner (see 222a7 in FIG. 13). Thereby, the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) can be clearly recognized by the player (see FIG. 5B).

  If the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is less than 1 second, or if the time effect is already in effect, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right part of the third symbol display device 81. Then, a variation effect in a mode of variation display is selected (see 222a8 in FIG. 13). This prevents (suppresses) the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) and the movement of the dog character 740 displayed during the time effect from being blocked by the variation display of the third symbol. it can.

  Furthermore, when the variation type is hit short reach, whether the normal mode, the reduced display mode, or the semi-transparent mode is selected as the mode of variation production is not appropriate. Judgment is based on the same criteria as short reach. That is, if the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is 16 seconds or more, the variable effect in which the third symbol is displayed in the normal display mode is selected (see 222a9 in FIG. 13). When the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is 2 seconds or more and less than 16 seconds, the 3rd symbol is reduced and displayed on the lower right portion of the 3rd symbol display device 81. A variation effect in a mode of variation display is selected (see 222a10 in FIG. 13). If the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the changing third symbol is displayed in a translucent manner (222a11 in FIG. 13). reference). If the remaining period (t) until the time effect is started is less than 1 second, or if the time effect is already in effect, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right part of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the variation effect in the mode of variation display is selected (see 222a12 in FIG. 13). Since the fluctuation short reach and the winning short reach have the same variation time, the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is clearly displayed by selecting the variation effect mode based on the same standard as the loss short reach. Can be made. Therefore, it can suppress that a player overlooks the start of time production.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the case of other variation types (outgoing long reach, hit long reach, outgoing super reach, hit super reach), each remaining time (t) value until the time effect is started. Different modes of variation production are defined. As a result, an aspect that does not hinder the display of the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is selected when any variation effect is executed. Therefore, it can be easily noticed to the player that the time effect has started.

  Returning to FIG. The time effect table 222b is a data table in which the execution period of the normal effect and the execution period of the time effect are defined in association with the elapsed time since the power is turned on. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to determine the elapsed time since the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 based on the time information (time information) of the RTC 292. Based on the value of the elapsed time and the specified contents of the time effect table 222b, it is determined whether the effect mode is a normal effect mode or a time effect mode.

  The determination of the effect mode is performed in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 of FIG. 35) of the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the determination value of the time effect table 222b shown in FIG. The effect mode is specified in accordance with the elapsed time T (see S1402 in FIG. 36) determined based on the time information (time information) of the RTC 292 (see S1403 in FIG. 36).

  Details of the time effect table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the time effect table 222 b stored in the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 14, in the time effect table 222b, whether or not it is the execution period of the normal effect (normal effect period) or the execution period of the time effect (time effect period), the gaming machine is turned on. It is defined in association with the value of the later elapsed time T.

  As shown in FIG. 14, in this embodiment, when it is within 60 minutes from turning on the power, it is a normal effect period (refer to 222b1 in FIG. 14), and for 3 minutes after 60 minutes have passed, it is a time effect period. (See 222b2 in FIG. 14). Then, after 3 minutes, which is the time effect period, has elapsed, the normal effect period is set again (see 222b3 in FIG. 14), and the normal effect period continues for 57 minutes. Thereafter, a 3 minute time effect period and a 57 minute normal effect period are alternately repeated.

  In this way, except for 60 minutes immediately after the power is turned on, if the game is played for one hour, it always switches to a different production period, so that the player can feel novelty by switching the production period. Therefore, even if a game is played for a long time, only similar effects are generated, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game. Further, since the special performance period of 3 minutes and the normal performance period of 57 minutes are periodically repeated, the player can easily grasp the time zone that is the time production period and the time zone that is the normal production period. . Therefore, the game can be started for each player during the stage of the stage in which the stage of the stage that matches the player's taste is performed, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In FIG. 14, the correspondence between the elapsed time T and the production period after the elapsed time T of 180 minutes is omitted, but actually, after 180 minutes, the special production period of 3 minutes and 57 minutes are also included. The normal production period is set to be repeated alternately. The range of the elapsed time T in the time effect table 222b may be set at least for the daily business hours of the hall. For example, the elapsed time T and the effect in the range where the elapsed time T is less than 1440 minutes (24 hours). A correspondence relationship with a period may be set, or a correspondence relationship for several days may be set. Further, the types of effect periods are not necessarily limited to two types, that is, the normal effect period and the time effect period, and three or more effect periods that are different from each other in the aspect of the effect to be executed may be provided.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a table defining the type of effect period is defined for each value of the elapsed time T. However, a table corresponding to all T values is not necessarily prepared. For example, the value range of the elapsed time T that is the normal effect period and the value range of the elapsed time T that is the time effect period are specified one by one, and the value of the value of the elapsed time T is specified. When the value is out of the range, a predetermined value may be added to the range of the specified elapsed time T. As a specific example, for example, the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the normal production period is 0 minute 00 seconds to 57:00 hours, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the time production period is 57:00 to 60 minutes. It is defined as 00 seconds, and when the value of the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, the range of the value of the elapsed time T that becomes the normal effect period and the value range of the elapsed time T that becomes the special effect period Control may be performed so that 60 minutes 00 seconds is added to each and the type of effect period in the range of the elapsed time T from 60 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds is reset.

  More specifically, in the time effect table 222b, the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the normal effect period is 0:00 to 57:00, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the time effect period is Only information that is 57:00 to 60 minutes 00 seconds is defined. Then, based on power-on, information defined in the time effect table 222b is copied to a predetermined area of the RAM 223, and the type of effect period is determined based on the copied information. When the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, which is the maximum value of the elapsed time T defined in the replicated information, 60 minutes 00 seconds is added to the replicated information to create a new one. Update to information. That is, the range of the elapsed time T that is the normal performance period is 60 minutes 00 seconds to 117 minutes 00 seconds, and the value range of the elapsed time T that is the special performance period is 117 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds. It is updated to information that there is. Thereafter, every 60 minutes and 00 seconds elapses, the reproduction information is controlled to be updated to new information by adding 60 minutes and 00 seconds, and the production period is based on the updated information and the elapsed time T. The type of is determined.

  In this case, since the data amount of the time effect table 222b is reduced, the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced. Therefore, the price of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. In the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, an insertion time storage area 223e, and a time effect flag 223f are stored. Are provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1508 in FIG. 37). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1502 in FIG. 37), and is turned off when setting of variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1702 in FIG. 39). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1505 in FIG. 37), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1707 in FIG. 39). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) is set.

  The turning-on time storage area 223e is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the power-on time of the pachinko machine 10, and stores the time information (timekeeping information) of the RTC 292 when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The Specifically, the current time information (time information) acquired from the RTC 292 is stored in the time setting process (see S1114 in FIG. 33) of the startup process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 221. The stored timekeeping information calculates the elapsed time T from the power-on in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 in FIG. 35) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 and the normal performance period. It is used to determine whether there is a time production period (see S1404 in FIG. 36). Since the contents stored in the RAM 223 are not backed up, the timekeeping information stored in the input time storage area 223e is lost when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of effect period is determined based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 and stored in the entry time storage area 223e during the start-up process (see FIG. 33). If the timing at which the start-up process (see FIG. 33) is performed in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, the timing at which the time information is stored in the input time storage area 223e of each pachinko machine 10 can also be matched. If the timing at which the time information is stored in the input time storage area 223e matches, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) in each pachinko machine 10 can also be adjusted. The timing for switching from the normal production period to the time production period based on T and the timing for switching from the time production period to the normal production period based on the elapsed time T can be matched. Thereby, the person concerned of a hall can arrange the production period of each pachinko machine 10 only by turning on power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 all at once. Therefore, some pachinko machines 10 have a normal performance period, and other pachinko machines 10 have a time performance period, so that a player who is playing a game performs a performance in a different performance mode from the other pachinko machines 10. It can be prevented (suppressed) that the user feels uncomfortable. In addition, as a method of turning on power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 at once, for example, an island composed of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 is provided, and an external power source that can be turned on in units of islands is provided. It should be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time is determined from the time information of the RTC 292, and the type of the production period is not switched according to the time zone, but the time information acquired during the start-up process and the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in the game, and the type of effect period is determined based on the elapsed time T. As a result, even if the time information of the RTC 292 of each pachinko machine 10 is deviated from each other due to deterioration over time, the deviated timing information is not directly used for determining the type of the production period, but is referred to as the elapsed time T. Since it can be converted into a relative value and used to determine the type of effect period, the effect of deviation can be reduced. Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, the timing for switching from the normal performance period to the special performance period based on the elapsed time T and the timing for switching from the special performance period to the normal performance period based on the elapsed time T can be matched. Therefore, since the performance periods of each pachinko machine 10 can be made uniform, some pachinko machines 10 become normal performance periods, and other pachinko machines 10 become time performance periods, so that a player who is playing a game It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being executed in a different performance mode from the other pachinko machines 10.

  The time effect flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the current effect period is a special effect period. This time effect flag 223f is a normal effect based on the time effect table 222b (see FIG. 14) in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 in FIG. 35) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is turned on when it is determined that the period is switched to the time effect period (see S1409 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, it is turned off when it is determined based on the time effect table 222b that the special effect period switches to the time effect period (see S1406 in FIG. 36). The time effect flag 223f is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  When the time effect flag 223f is turned on, a back image change command corresponding to the time effect is set (see S1410 in FIG. 36), and the time effect is supported based on receiving the back image change command. A back image is displayed. On the other hand, when the time effect flag 223f is turned off, the back image change command corresponding to the normal back surface (rear surface A) is set, so that the normal effect is supported based on receiving the back image change command. The rear image (back A) is displayed (see S1407 in FIG. 36).

  As described above, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As the back image displayed during the time performance, for example, the notification image 750 shown in FIG. 6B (see FIG. 6B), or the image of the dog character 740 shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. Can be mentioned. The time effect continues until the display control device 114 receives a rear image change command (see S1407 in FIG. 36) output based on the time effect flag 223f being turned off.

  In addition, if a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of this embodiment are arranged side by side (by configuring an island) in the hall, an effect mode of an effect performed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 configuring the island can be set in a time zone. Accordingly, it is possible to switch to different production modes all at once (linked to islands). By performing island interlocking, different modes of performance are executed according to the timing of playing the game, so each player has a performance mode (ordinary performance or time performance) that suits their tastes. The game can be started at the timing to be performed. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of the production period is switched according to the elapsed time, but island linkage may be performed according to the day of the week, the date, the season, or the like.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 37) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 29).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  The RTC 292 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and is configured with a real-time clock capable of measuring the current time. The electrical configuration of the RTC 292 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the RTC 292. The RTC 292 includes an input / output port 350, a device control unit 351, and a register 352. The RTC 292 is connected to an RTC power supply 353. The RTC power source 353 is a power source dedicated to the RTC 292, which is different from the power source of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC 292 even when the power source of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. As the RTC power source 353, for example, a button type battery is used.

  An input / output port 350 and a register 352 are connected to the device control unit 351 of the RTC 292. The input / output port 350 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 so as to communicate with each other. The device control unit 351 controls the register 352 to perform various controls such as counting the current time and writing data.

  The register 352 is a storage area in which data can be temporarily stored and operations can be performed on the stored data. As shown in FIG. 15, the register 352 is provided with at least a time register 352a and a time information storage area 352b.

  The clock register 352a is a register for clocking the current time, and the register value is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 1/4096 second). It is determined whether or not it is the execution period of the time effect based on the time information timed in the time register 352a.

  The time information storage area 352b is a storage area in which time information can be written and the stored information can be overwritten. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (when there is information on the occurrence of power interruption), the timing information acquired at the time of turning on the power stored in the on time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 is written. It is. As described above, since power is supplied to the RTC 292 from the RTC power supply 353 independent of the power of the pachinko machine 10, the timekeeping information at the time of power-on is retained even while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. be able to. Therefore, for example, even when a part of the power supply of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is cut off during the game, the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area 352b when the power is restored can be stored in the input time storage area 223e. it can. That is, it is possible to determine whether or not it is the execution period of the time effect based on the same timekeeping information as the other pachinko machine 10 whose power is not shut off. Therefore, it can suppress that the execution timing of a time effect shifts with the pachinko machine 10 from which the power supply was interrupted, and other pachinko machines 10.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the clock register 352a (corresponding to the current time measured by the RTC 292) is stored in the on time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 based on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on. (Time keeping information) is stored, or it is determined whether the time information stored in the time information storage area 352b is stored. That is, when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed and the power is turned on, the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area 352b is stored in the turn-on time storage area 223e. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without the RAM erase switch 122 being pressed, the value of the time register 352a (time information corresponding to the current time measured by the RTC 292) is stored in the turn-on time storage area 223e. ing.

  As a result, the hall clerk can turn on the power at the same time without pressing down the RAM erase switch 122 of each pachinko machine 10 during the opening time of the hall, etc., so that the elapsed time from the power-on that each pachinko machine 10 grasps. Can be matched. Therefore, in each pachinko machine 10, the execution periods of the time effects can be matched. On the other hand, when the power of some of the pachinko machines 10 is shut off during the business hours of the hall (for example, when canceling the error), the RAM erase switch 122 is kept pressed when the power is turned on again. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the timing information stored in the time information storage area 352b can be stored in the input time storage area 223e. Therefore, it can suppress that the execution timing of a time effect shifts with the pachinko machine 10 from which the power supply was interrupted, and other pachinko machines 10.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots and the number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also reads and writes data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code at the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, Fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is a control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Accordingly, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 40) executed after the end of the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 40) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 22) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 40). The main image at power-on is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after power-on. Compared to images displayed during normal games, the amount of data is small and the images are simple. For this reason, it is possible to quickly transfer image data and display an image after the power is turned on.

  When the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a command to start variation during display of the main image when the power is turned on, the display control device 114 On the main image display screen when the power is turned on, the fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol The change image is alternately displayed during the change period. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is “special symbol jackpot”, “○” symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is “out of special symbol”, “×” symbol is displayed after stopping the changing effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the “◯” symbol and the “×” symbol are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG.18 and FIG.19, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images is demonstrated. FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the three types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 18B shows the rear surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 19 shows the rear surface C corresponding to the “island stage”. Respectively.

  Among the back surfaces A to C, the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured so that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 228 to change the stage to “city stage” or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between the position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding back image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, the back image on the back C is the third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back C is the third pattern in a state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to “island stage” by the player operating the frame button 228, a rear image shown in FIG. 19A is displayed as an initial rear image of the rear C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 19A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 19B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 19B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 19C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 19C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 19A is restored, and the back images shown in FIGS. 19A to 19C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage receives only a part of the rear surface, that is, image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c. Further, the back C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 19A, and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 19A and 19B excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 228 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 228 is operated at an arbitrary timing, In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is within the range from the position a to the position a ′ or the range shown in FIGS. The image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. 19A to 19B is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 can be obtained when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 228 by the player. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and back surface C are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is to be able, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images shown in FIGS. 19A to 19B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 19 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 19 (b) to 19 (c) and 19 (c) to (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 19B to 19C and FIGS. 19C to 19A are normally used while the images of FIGS. 19A to 19B are displayed. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the images shown in FIGS. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 19B to 19C and FIGS. 19C to 19A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time. be able to.

  Note that on the back B and back C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 16) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, furoshiki, helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, final display effects, and demo effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state. In the fixed display effect, after the variation effect is finished, when there is no holding ball (that is, when the next variation effect is not started), the third graphic that is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the completed variation effect is stopped as it is. It is an effect that continues to be displayed. This final display effect continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64. By displaying the final display effect, the player can recognize that the special symbol lottery condition has not been established, so that the ball can be launched aiming at the first entrance 64. As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. As the third symbol is not displayed, the back image changes (see FIG. 7). If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, display data tables corresponding to a variation effect, an opening effect, a round effect, an ending effect, a final display effect, and a demonstration effect are stored, respectively. Details of the data table storage area 233b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram showing data stored in the data table storage area 233b. The data table storage area 233b is provided with a storage area for storing a data table corresponding to each effect (variation effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect, final display effect, and demo effect).

  As shown in FIG. 17, an area for storing a data table corresponding to a variation effect (variation effect table storage area) includes a display data table corresponding to various variation effects in a normal mode (see 233 b 1 in FIG. 17), A display data table corresponding to various variation effects in a manner of reduced display and variation display (see 233b2 in FIG. 17), and a display data table corresponding to various variation effects in a manner of being displayed in a translucent manner (see FIG. 17). 233b3) are stored respectively. As described above, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 calculates the remaining time (t) until the time effect is started based on the time information measured by the RTC 292. . Then, according to the remaining time (t), a variation effect mode that does not interfere with the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is determined, and the determined variation effect mode is determined by a display variation pattern command. The display control device 114 is configured to be notified. In the variation effect table storage area, display data tables corresponding to all aspects of the variation effect that can be notified by the display variation pattern command are stored.

  Also, the opening effect table storage area is executed to notify the player that a big hit has been made at the start of a special game state (a big win state) that shifts when the special symbol lottery result is a big win. The display data table corresponding to the opening effect is stored (see 233b4 in FIG. 17). In addition, as a display data table corresponding to the opening effect, for example, different display data tables are selected according to the jackpot type (that is, a plurality of display data tables are provided, and an opening effect having a different display mode according to the jackpot type). May be selected). Thereby, since the effect of a different aspect is displayed according to the jackpot type, the effect can be diversified, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, as a display data table corresponding to the opening effect, only one type of table used in common for all jackpots may be provided. Thereby, the data amount of the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 can be reduced.

  In the round effect table storage area, a display data table corresponding to the round effect displayed during each jackpot round is stored (see 233b5 in FIG. 17). In the ending effect table storage area, a display data table corresponding to the ending effect displayed to notify the player of the end of the jackpot is stored (see 233b6 in FIG. 17).

  In the table display area for finalized display effects, a display data table corresponding to effects for displaying the third symbol in a normal manner (see 233b7 in FIG. 17), and the third symbol in the lower right part of the third symbol display device 81 The display data table corresponding to the effect of the display mode reduced in size (see 233b8 in FIG. 17) is stored. Depending on whether or not the timing for starting the confirmed display effect is during the time effect period, the display data table of any aspect is selected and set.

  The demonstration effect table storage area includes a display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect for the normal effect period (see 233b9 in FIG. 17), and a display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect for the time effect period (233b10 in FIG. 17). Reference) is stored. As the display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect for the time effect period, for example, a display data table in which no demonstration image is defined is stored. That is, when the start timing of the time effect is reached during the demo effect, or when the start condition of the demo effect is satisfied during the time effect, the demo image is not displayed (that is, the back image for the time effect is displayed in the demo image). Therefore, the time effect can be displayed using the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the freedom degree of time production can be raised more.

  In addition, the aspect of the demonstration effect performed during the time effect is not limited to this, and the demo image is displayed as long as the image of the time effect can be prevented from being blocked by the demonstration effect. Also good. For example, the demonstration effect may be displayed only in the small display area 780 (see FIG. 8A) where the variable effect is reduced and displayed during the time effect. Further, a display area having a display area smaller than that of the small display area 780 may be provided, and a demonstration effect may be displayed in the display area. Further, for example, the demonstration effect itself may be configured not to be performed, and the confirmation display may be continuously performed. In other words, if there is no holding ball when the 3rd symbol fluctuation is stopped, the stopped symbol is reduced to the lower right part of the 3rd symbol display device 81 as long as there is no new ball entering the first entrance 64. You may comprise so that it may display in the aspect. Thereby, the effect during the time effect can be clearly displayed. Therefore, even if a demonstration effect is performed in a hall or the like where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed side by side, it is possible to perform an effect with a sense of unity by displaying time effects all at once.

  Thus, the data table storage area 233b stores the display data table corresponding to all of the various display effects instructed to be executed by the audio lamp control device 113, so that the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 can store the audio lamp. A variety of display effects can be easily executed simply by selecting and setting a display data table corresponding to the command output from the control device 113 from the data table storage area 233b.

  Next, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C (for example, an image corresponding to a time effect) is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” that is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is included in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 20). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  In addition, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10, an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 21 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 21).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 21, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 21, when the pointer 233f is “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the above power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S1805 in FIG. 40). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3605 in FIG. 54B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 42B). If the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 42B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 42B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 42 (b) S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 43 to 48) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 49 to 53) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3501 in FIG. 54A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 54B) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 55) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, describing the contents of image drawing instructions for is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 22) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of the image for one frame (FIG. 42B). )), The pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 49) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 22), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 22, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be arranged on the most back side, and the last drawn sprite can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 42B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 49). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3713 in FIG. 55). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 55). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3802 in FIG. 56).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, the drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 42B) is executed (see S3802 in FIG. 56).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passes along with the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. Processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 31) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S209: No), the display content of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows: It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S212). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), a special symbol jackpot start is set (S213), and the process is terminated. When the special symbol jackpot start is set by the processing of S213, if the jackpot control processing (S904) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 31), the process branches to S1001: Yes, and the opening command Is set. As a result, the big hit effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the process of S213, the probability variation flag 203e is set to OFF, or the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is set to 0. This is because the big hit state is set to the same state as the initial state.

  In the process of S212, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S214), and the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1. If it is above (S214: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the hour / minute counter 203f (S215), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203f is 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 24) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, a lottery (decision determination) of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol losing” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the effect to be performed.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state. If the probability variation flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol certain variation state. If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state.

  When the probability variation flag 203e is on (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol certain variation state, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the first value for the high probability time are displayed. Based on the per random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random number values stored in the first random number table for high probability. As described above, ten random numbers corresponding to the special symbol, “4, 38, 64, 99, 122, 151, 183, 218, 249, 270”, are set. When the value of the counter C1 matches the random number value that is a hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability variation flag 203e is off (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 Based on the first random number table for low probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with one random number value stored in the first per-random number table for low probability. “7” is set as the random value that is a special symbol jackpot. If the value of the first random number counter C1 matches “7”, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode for the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table, and two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A , The jackpot type B) is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (16 round probability variation big hit), and if it is in the range of “50 to 99”, It is determined that the jackpot is B (short jackpot at 16 rounds) (see FIG. 11B).

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, the fluctuation pattern for losing is defined as “completely out”, “outside short reach”, “outside long reach”, and “outside super reach”. “Short reach”, “Long reach”, and “Super reach” are defined.

  In the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear out of reach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the processing of S307 or S39 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 31). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 23), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and there is a start winning. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reservation balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 31) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, on the basis of the various counter values stored in the process of S406, prediction of whether or not the lottery for the special symbol (whether it is a big hit), its stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big win), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407).

  If the process of S407 predicts whether the lottery is a special symbol, the stop type (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and the variation pattern, then the predicted lottery, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408), and this process is terminated.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S901) of a main process (see FIG. 31) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores these information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S107). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S501). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S504). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S505).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the processing of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S508). The time reduction / intermediate counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S509). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to S511. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning slot 65a, so the electric accessory attached to the first winning slot 64 is released. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the specific winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64, even if it is suppressed that the ball enters the first entrance 64 during the big hit of the special symbol, A lot of balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S509, if the special symbol is not big hit (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol, so acquired in the process of S507. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C4 and the second per-random number table for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second per-random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 11C).

  In the process of S508, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S508: No), the process proceeds to S511. In the process of S511, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 and the low Based on the second random number table for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 11C).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S510 or S511 is a normal symbol win (S512). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S512: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S514). It is determined whether or not (S515). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S515: Yes), the process proceeds to S517. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S515, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S515: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in a special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S516), and the process proceeds to S519. In the process of S514, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S514: No), the process proceeds to S517. In the process of S517, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of releases is set to 1 (S517), and the process proceeds to S519.

  If it is determined in step S512 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S512: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S518). In the process of S518, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S519.

  In the process of S519, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S519). The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S519: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S521), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S520 or the processing of S521 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S522 (S522: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S522 (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the process of S523, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lights up). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S518, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S523, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 31) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighted display) in the display mode set in the processing of S513 or S518.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S524). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S525), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric power article is set by the process of S525, when the electric character object opening / closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 31) is executed next, the electric character object opening / closing control is performed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 or S517 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S524, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), the process of S525 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the second entrance 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is 4. If not less than this (S603: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S605), and this process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804). If it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S810. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shut-off has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S810 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S810. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S914 of the main processing (see FIG. 26). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S810, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S810). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S811, S812) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S811, S812) is executed. Similarly, the initialization processing (S811, S812) of the RAM 203 is executed when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S811, S812), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S811), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S812). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S813.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is retained in the RAM 203 (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S813. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S813, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S814), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 23) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 24) or the start winning process (see FIG. 26) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 26) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 has been updated, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S525 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 27), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S516 in the normal symbol variation processing or the processing of S517 are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 25), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 25) is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 25). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S520 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 27) or the processing of S521, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Also, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 27), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S513 or the processing of S518 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 27) ( (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S909: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S901-S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S908, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 29 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S913). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack in the initial setting process (S801) By setting the pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or a specific prize This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 24) S213 is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1001, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1003). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1003: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol is a big hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1006). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1007, when the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed.

  In the process of S1009, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: Yes), an ending command is set (S1010), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. When receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the ending start timing in the processing of S1009 (S1009: No), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011). If it is determined in the processing of S1011 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot A (S1012), and if it is a jackpot A (S1012) : Yes), in order to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of jackpot A, the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1015.

  In the processing of S1012, if it is determined that the current big hit is not big hit A (that is, big hit B), in order to shift to the short time state of the normal symbol after the big hit B ends, 100 is set (S1013), and the process proceeds to S1015. In the process of S1015 executed after the process of S1013 or S1014, the end of the jackpot is set and the process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1011: No), this process is terminated as it is. With this jackpot control process (see FIG. 32), various settings related to the jackpot can be made.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, referring to FIG. 33, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing in S1318 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (instant power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) (see FIG. 35). ) Is determined during execution (S1102). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1314 in FIG. 35), it executes a power-off process in S1318. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1102: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off in S1318 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1103).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1106. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1103: Yes), the process proceeds to S1104, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1103: No), the process proceeds to S1108.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1103: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1104. On the other hand, this start-up process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1318, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1103: No), and the process proceeds to S1108.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1102: Yes), the current ramp-up process is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1104 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1104, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1104). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1105: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1106). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1105: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1107), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1108, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1108). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1318 is executed (see S1316 in FIG. 35). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1318 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1318 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1109), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1111). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  Next, a time setting process for storing timekeeping information for determining the execution period of the time effect in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 is executed (S1112), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1108 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1108 is performed via the processes of S1104 to S1106. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1108: No), S1109, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1110, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1110), and interrupt permission is set. The time setting process is executed (S1112), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1109 is that when the process from S1104 to S1108 is reached via the process in S1106, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1104. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the time setting process (S1114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. This time setting process (S1114) is a process for storing time information corresponding to the time when the power is turned on. The timing information acquired by this process is used to determine the elapsed time from power-on in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 in FIG. 35) performed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 described later. It is done.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this time setting process (S1114). When the time setting process (S1114) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is turned on (S1201). If it is turned on (S1201: Yes), the RTC 292 The time information is read from the time information storage area 352b provided in the register 352 (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1204.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (that is, is off) (S1201: No), the timekeeping information timed by the RTC 292 is read from the timekeeping register 352a (S1203). The process proceeds to S1204. In the process of S1204, the time information read out in the process of S1202 or the process of S1203 is stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 (S1205), and this process ends.

  In this way, time information (timekeeping information) for determining the type of the production period is stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 by the start-up process, so that the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall are turned on. If the timing (that is, the start-up process is performed) is matched, the timing at which the time information is stored in the input time storage area 223e of each pachinko machine 10 can also be matched. If the time information is stored in the input time storage area 223e, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (see FIG. 36) in each pachinko machine 10 can also be adjusted. Based on the elapsed time T, the timing for switching from the normal performance period to the time performance period and the timing for switching from the time performance period to the normal performance period can be matched. Thereby, the person concerned of a hall can arrange the production period of each pachinko machine 10 only by turning on power to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall all at once. Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall, an effect with a sense of unity can be displayed, so that the player's interest in games can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the time is determined from the time information of the RTC 292, and the type of effect period is not switched according to the time zone, but the time information acquired during the start-up process and the elapsed time confirmation process (FIG. 36). The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in the reference), and the type of the production period is determined based on the elapsed time T. As a result, even if the time information of the RTC 292 of each pachinko machine 10 is shifted from each other due to deterioration over time, the shifted time information is not directly used for determining the type of the production period, but the elapsed time T Therefore, the influence of the shift can be reduced. Therefore, in the several pachinko machine 10, the timing which switches from a normal production period to a time production period, and the timing which switches from a time production period to a normal production period can be united based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the performance periods of each pachinko machine 10 can be made uniform, some pachinko machines 10 become normal performance periods, and other pachinko machines 10 become time performance periods, so that a player who is playing a game It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being executed in a different performance mode from the other pachinko machines 10.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, the time information stored in the time information storage area 352b is stored in the RAM time information. Stored in area 223f. The time information storage area 352b stores the time information stored in the ON time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 when the power is shut off (see S1317 in FIG. 35). As a result, the time information stored in the turn-on time storage area 223e when the power is turned off can be restored as it is.

  Thereby, for example, when it is necessary to put one pachinko machine 10 in a power-off state during business due to reasons such as a board replacement required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or an on-site inspection being performed. Also, when the power is turned on again without pressing the RAM erase switch 122 last time, it is stored in the turn-on time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 122 last time. The time information (time keeping information) stored in the time information storage area 352b of the RTC 292 at the time of the power interruption state can be stored again in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223. Therefore, if a plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall are turned on all at once without pressing down the RAM erasing switch 122, then one pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state. In addition, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again, the time information (time information) when the power is turned on all at once can be stored in the turn-on time storage area 223e simply by pressing the RAM erase switch 122. . Therefore, the elapsed time T can be determined based on the same time information (time keeping information) before and after the power is turned on. Accordingly, since the timing for switching from the normal performance period to the time performance period and the timing for switching from the time performance period to the normal performance period can be matched based on the same elapsed time T as other game machines, the power interruption state is established. Only the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from shifting the timing at which the effect mode is switched, and an effect with a sense of unity can be executed in the time effect period.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time information stored in the time information storage area 352b of the RTC 292 is determined in the time setting process (see FIG. 34) when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Although it is controlled to read (see S1202) and store it in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 (see S1205), it is not limited to this form. For example, a switch means used exclusively for time acquisition processing different from the RAM erase switch 122 is provided, and when the switch means is on in the time setting processing (see FIG. 34), the time information storage area of the RTC 292 You may comprise so that the time information memorize | stored in 352b may be read.

  As a result, the time information stored in the time information storage area 352b of the RTC 292 can be stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 while retaining the information stored in the RAM 223 before the interruption state. . Therefore, even if it was in a power interruption state with a holding ball remaining, or even when it was in a power interruption state during a high probability state of a special symbol, it remained based on the power reactivation Since it is possible to suppress the disappearance of the holding ball or the transition from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, it is reported that the player will be disadvantaged (suppression) can do.

  Further, instead of using a switch means such as the RAM erase switch 122, when the time measured by the RTC 292 is in a predetermined time zone, the time information storage area 352b of the RTC 292 is stored based on the power-on of the pachinko machine 10. The time information thus read may be read out and stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223. Further, in a time zone other than the predetermined time zone, based on the power-on of the pachinko machine 10, the timekeeping information timed by the RTC 292 is read from the timekeeping register 352a and stored in the time-of-day storage area 223e of the RAM 223. Also good. In this case, as the predetermined time zone, for example, the business hours of the hall may be set as 10:00 to 22:45.

  With this configuration, time information corresponding to the current time (time information) can be obtained by simply turning on the pachinko machine 10 before the start of a predetermined time period (before 10:00). ) Can be stored in the turn-on time storage area 223e of each pachinko machine 10, so that the elapsed time grasped by each pachinko machine 10 that has been turned on can be matched. Therefore, the production period of the time production can be adjusted. In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off during a predetermined time period (during the business period of the hall), it is stored in the on time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 only when the power is turned on all at once. The time information (time information) that has been stored can be restored. In other words, without performing a special operation such as pressing down of the RAM erasing switch 122, it is possible to match the presentation period of the time effect between the pachinko machine 10 whose power is cut off and the pachinko machine 10 whose power is not cut off.

  Therefore, the employee of the hall turns on the power of the pachinko machine 10 that is cut off during business hours by turning on the power again without turning on the RAM erase switch 122 due to a mistake. Is stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 233, and the elapsed time T can be prevented (suppressed) from deviating from other pachinko machines 10 that have not been disconnected (a human error can be prevented). it can). Therefore, the timing at which the production period is switched can be surely matched between the pachinko machine 10 that is in the disconnected state during business hours and the pachinko machine 10 that is not in the disconnected state. Moreover, since no special operation is required, the labor of the hall employees can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312, without performing S1302 to S1311. In S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S1302 to S1311 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1312 and the variable display setting process of S1313 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1313 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 228 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 228 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 228 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 228 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 228 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during a high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. Also, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, press the frame button 228 to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or press the frame button 228 during reach production to increase the expectation of the jackpot It is good also as a decision button for changing to the effect which can be held, or selecting the reach effect of the frame button 228 among several reach effects. If the frame button 228 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1310 ends, an elapsed time confirmation process is executed (S1311). In this elapsed time confirmation process, the current performance period is determined based on the time information (time information) of the RTC 292. Details of the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1312, a command determination process that performs a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed (S1312). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1313). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1313 is finished, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1314). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If it is determined in the processing of S1314 that the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1314: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1316), and the ON time storage area of the RAM 223 is stored. The time information stored in 223e is written into the time information storage area 352b of the RTC 292 (S1317), and the power-off process is executed (S1318). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1319), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1314 (S1314: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1315), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1315: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1315: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this elapsed time confirmation process (S1311). In this elapsed time confirmation process (S1311), it is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and based on the time information (time information) of the RTC 292 as described above. The current production period (whether it is a normal production period or a time production period) is determined.

  In the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311), first, the current time information is read from the time register 352a of the RTC 292 (S1401), and based on the read current time and the time information stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223. Then, an elapsed time T from power-on is calculated (S1402). Here, as a method of calculating the elapsed time T, the time information stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 may be subtracted from the information indicating the current time read from the time register 352a of the RTC 292. For example, if the current time information read from the time register 352a is information indicating AM10: 15, and the time information stored in the input time storage area 223e is information indicating AM9: 00, the elapsed time T is The difference between 10:15 and 9:00 is calculated as 75 minutes.

  Then, based on the calculated elapsed time T and the time effect table 222b of the ROM 222 (see FIG. 14), the current effect period is specified (S1403), and whether or not the current effect period is the time effect period. It is determined (S1404).

  As a result of the processing of S1404, if it is determined that it is not the time effect period (that is, the normal effect period) (S1404: No), it is determined whether or not the time effect flag 223f is on (S1405). If the time effect flag 223f is on (S1405: Yes), it means that the time effect period has been switched to the normal effect period in this main process, so the time effect flag 223f is turned off (S1406). Next, a rear image change command for setting the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to a normal rear image (rear surface A) is set (S1407), and this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S1405, when the time effect flag 223f is off (S1405: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1404, if it is determined that it is a time effect period (S1404: Yes), it is determined whether or not the time effect flag 223f is on (S1408), and the time effect flag 223f is on. If there is (S1408: Yes), this process ends. If the time effect flag 223f is off (S1408: No), it means that the normal effect period has been switched to the time effect period in the current main process, so the time effect flag 223f is turned on ( S1409). Next, a rear image change command for changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to a rear image corresponding to the time effect is set (S1410), and this process ends.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time effect flag 223f is switched when the effect period is switched, but is not limited thereto. For example, when the back image is a simple image such as a fixed image of a single picture (when the back image does not change due to scrolling or the like), the time effect flag 223f is updated and displayed for each elapsed time confirmation process. The rear image change command may be set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1312). This command determination processing (S1312) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1501). When the variation pattern command is received (S1501: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1502), and the variation pattern selection for extracting the variation pattern type from the received variation pattern command is performed. The process is executed (S1503), and the process returns to the main process. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 39) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1504). When the stop type command is received (S1504: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1506). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 39) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1504: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1507). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1507: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). Is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1508). In the processing of S1508, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1508 is completed, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected, or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1508. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1408 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in S1507 that the pending ball number command has not been received (S1507: No), it is then determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1509). When the opening command is received (S1509: Yes), a display opening command for executing the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set (S1510), and the process returns to the main process. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the opening command has not been received in the processing of S1509 (S1509: No), it is then determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1511). When the round number command is received (S1511: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1512), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1513), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the round number command has not been received in the processing of S1511 (S1511: No), it is then determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main controller 110, and the ending command has been received. (S1514: Yes), a display ending command is set (S1516), and this process ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the control device 114. When receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the ending command has not been received in the process of S1514 (S1514: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1515). ), The process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  By this processing, it is possible to set commands for performing various settings for the display control device 114 based on commands output from the main control device 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the fluctuation pattern selection process (S1503) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1503). This variation pattern selection processing (S1503) is executed in the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1503 in FIG. 37). When the variation pattern command is received, This is a process for extracting the variation effect mode from the variation pattern table 222a.

  In this variation pattern selection process, first, time information corresponding to the current time is acquired from the clock register 352a of the RTC 292 (S1601), and the acquired time information and the power-on time stored in the power-on time storage area 223e are corresponded. The elapsed time (T) after power-on is calculated from the time information to be performed (S1602).

  Next, based on the calculated elapsed time (T) and the time effect table 222b, the remaining time (t) until the next time effect is started is calculated (S1603). For example, if the elapsed time (T) is 0 hour 55:00, the next time effect starts at 60 minutes 00 seconds, so the remaining time (t) is calculated as 5 minutes. Then, the fluctuation pattern table 222a is read (S1604), and the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation type notified by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 and the remaining time (t) calculated by the process of S1603. Is extracted (S1605), and this process is terminated.

  Since the variation pattern (variation display) mode can be extracted by taking into account the remaining time (t) until the next time production by this variation pattern selection process, the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is displayed. Fluctuation display can be executed without shielding.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1313). This variable display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 38). The variation pattern type in the variation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the processing of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1506 of the command determination process (see FIG. 37), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  Next, based on the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S1709), and the process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 56. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). Accordingly, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

  In addition, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 40). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 40) (S1905), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 40), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all configured by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 41, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1902 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. The processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S1902.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is canceled. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1803, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1804, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S1805). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 54A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3502 in FIG. 54A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B), the simple command determination process (see FIG. 42) so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) is drawn. 42 (b) S2108) and simple display setting processing (see S2109 of FIG. 42B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. When the display 113 is used, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on can be displayed immediately during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806). Thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 22) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 42B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2105) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 22 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2104.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 48, the details of the above-described command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 43, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2203).

  In the unprocessed command, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to S2201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44A, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described. FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command process, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the variation effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b. (See FIG. 17) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S2301, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2306), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2305 is updated, while the change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301 is updated. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2302. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the process of S2204 (S2204: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2207), and the processing returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S2403), and the process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the task process (S2104) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2403, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S2402.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 43, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2206 that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2208). If there is a command opening command (S2208: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2209), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the opening effect table storage area (see FIG. 17) in the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the processing of S2501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2505), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2504, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501, The drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of one frame to be displayed next is specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2502. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance in the character ROM 234. As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, it produces a big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) due to its slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data to be used to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Since the display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is completed, it indicates the first round. If image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required after the opening effect is finished until the round effect is started. There is a risk that time will be generated, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped, or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 are completed (for 16 rounds). If image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display ending command is received, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. May occur, causing the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the operation has stopped, and to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a display opening command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from that point, and until the jackpot variation display is ended in the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect ends. Thereby, when the opening effect is finished in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the 3rd symbol display device 81 (for 16 rounds). ) Since the ending effect can be started immediately on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it is finished, the player will not feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started therefrom, Control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect ends before the variation effect that is a big hit ends in the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the variation effect that is a big hit in the 3rd symbol display device 81 ends, the opening effect can be started immediately in the 3rd symbol display device 81, so the player is concerned that the operation has not stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 43, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2208 that there is no display opening command (S2208: No), it is then determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2210). If there is a round number command for use (S2210: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2211), and the processing returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is stored in the round effect table in the data table storage area 233b. The data is read from the area (see FIG. 17) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2601). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2602).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2601, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2605), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2210 that there is no display round number command (S2210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2212), and the display If there is an ending command (S2212: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2213), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is used as the ending effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b. (See FIG. 17) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2701). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2702). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2705), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this ending command process, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol jackpot ends, so that the player recognizes that the jackpot has ended. Can be made.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2212 that there is no display ending command (S2212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2214). If there is a change command (S2214: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2215), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 47, the details of the back image change command processing (S2215) will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag is set to ON (S2801). Thereby, it is possible to determine the change of the back image in the normal image transfer setting process (S3503). Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C and the back corresponding to the time effect), a back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set. In addition to turning on, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the other back image type is set to off (S2802), and the process proceeds to S2803.

  In the normal image transfer setting process (S3503), when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2801 is turned on, the back image type after the change is determined from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. Is identified. If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to a back image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that when the rear image type after the change is the rear A, since all the image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235c, the image is not transferred.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back A to C or the back corresponding to the time effect is displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the processing of S2802 From the set back image discrimination flag, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and further, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the image corresponding to the back image range The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which data is stored and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 228 in 20 milliseconds or less, the player does not receive two or more back image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. In this case, two or more back image change commands are not stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. In the processing of S2802, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  When the processing of S2802 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the back surface type notified by the back image change command is the back surface for time effect (S2803), and if it is not the back surface for time effect (S2803: No). Then, this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the back surface type notified by the back image change command is the back surface for time effect (S2803: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the final display flag is on (S2804). This fixed display flag is a flag indicating that a fixed display effect (see FIG. 6A) for determining and displaying the third symbol is being executed. In the fixed display setting process described later, the fixed symbol is displayed in the fixed display of the third symbol. After setting the corresponding display data table, it is set to ON (see S3310 in FIG. 52).

  In the process of S2804, when it is determined that the final display flag is not on (that is, off) (S2804: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the confirmation display flag is on (S2804: Yes), the state of the third symbol is being confirmed or displayed, or the demonstration effect (see FIG. 7) is displayed. It means that the rear image change command corresponding to is received. Therefore, in this case, the value of the time counter is set to 0 (S2805), the display data table buffer is cleared (S2806), and this process ends. By clearing the display data table buffer, the displayed third symbol or demo image can be erased.

  Here, as described above, in the state where the third symbol is fixedly displayed, most of the rear image is shielded by the third symbol (see FIG. 6A). In addition, since the demonstration image is displayed on the entire third symbol display device 81 in the demonstration effect during the normal performance period, the rear image is shielded. That is, in either case, it is difficult for the player to see the back image. Even if the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is displayed in the main display area Dm in this state, most of the notification image 750 is shielded by the third symbol, so that the player can perform the time effect. There is a risk of overlooking the start. Therefore, in the present embodiment, at the start timing of the time effect, when the third symbol is confirmed and displayed, or when the demonstration effect is being performed, the third symbol or the demo image is erased by the processing of S2805 and S2806. Thus, control is performed so that the rear image can be clearly recognized. Thereby, a player can confirm the notification image 750 (refer FIG.6 (b)) reliably.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2214 that there is no rear image change command (S2214: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2216). If (S2216: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2217), and the process returns to S2201.

  Details of the error command process (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S2902). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2216 that there is no error command (S2216: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2218), and the processing returns to S2201.

  In the processing of S2201 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), The processing of S2202 to S2218 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2201 to S2218 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination End the process.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction is performed, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 44 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 44 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 44A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53, details of the above-described display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S3002), and S3003 to S3004. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3203), and if it is a demo display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data table buffer. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), this processing is terminated, and the display is completed. Return to the setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3206). ), This process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which End information is written is set. Since the drawn contents are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image expanded in the processing of S3006 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). When the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3008: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3009: No), the confirmation display for setting the third symbol confirmation display has not been performed yet, and the confirmation display effect has been set. A setting process is executed (S3010), and this process ends.

  Details of the final display setting process (S3010) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the finalized display setting process (S3010).

  In the fixed display setting process, first, a back image discrimination flag is read (S3301), and it is determined whether or not the currently set back type is the back corresponding to the time effect (S3302). If it is determined that it is not the back corresponding to the time effect (S3302: No), the fixed display data table in the normal mode is read from the fixed display effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3303), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3304). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3305), and the process proceeds to S3309.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S3302 that the currently set back surface type is the back surface corresponding to the time effect (S3302: Yes), the third symbol is displayed in a reduced form (FIG. 9A). (See) the fixed display data table is read from the fixed display effect table storage area in the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The contents are cleared (S3307). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3308), and the process proceeds to S3309. An image of the dog character 740 or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the time effect is set by setting a fixed display data table in a manner in which the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. (Refer to FIG. 8 and FIG. 9) can be prevented from being obstructed by the third symbol.

  In the process of S3309, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3309). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3310), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3311), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S3311 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S2104), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change, the stop pattern of the change effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop pattern determination flag set by the process of S3311. Then, by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. In the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3009: Yes), a demonstration display setting process for setting the display mode of the demonstration effect is executed (S3011), and this process is terminated. Details of the demonstration display setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the demo display setting process. In this demonstration display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3401). If the demo display flag is off (S3401: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the rear image discrimination flag is read (S3402). ), It is determined whether or not the currently set back surface type is the back surface type corresponding to the time effect (S3403). If it is determined in the processing of S3403 that the current setting is not the rear face for the time effect (S3403: No), the demo display data during the normal effect period from the demonstration effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b. The table is read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3404), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3405). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3406), and the process proceeds to S3410.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3403 that the currently set back surface type is the back surface type corresponding to the time effect (S3403: Yes), the demo effect table storage area (FIG. 17) in the data table storage area 233b. The demo display data table during the time effect period is read out and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3407). As described above, the demonstration effect during the time effect is such that no demo image is displayed, and the time effect image is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is playing a game, it is possible to clearly display the time effect on all the pachinko machines 10, so that a plurality of pachinko machines 10 can produce a unified feeling. can do. Note that a demo image may be displayed as long as it does not interfere with the image displayed during the time effect period. For example, the demo image may be configured to be displayed only in the small display area 780 (see FIG. 8A) in which the variation effect is reduced and displayed during the time effect. Thereby, it is easy for a player who is looking for a table to play a game to prevent a game from being played in the pachinko machine 10 while preventing (suppressing) the image of the time effect from being blocked by the demonstration effect. Can be recognized.

  When the processing of S3407 ends, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3408). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3409), and the process proceeds to S3410.

  In the process of S3410 executed after the process of S3406 or S3409 is completed, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3410), and the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON. (S3411), this process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, even if a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the fixed display of the third symbol, the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display opening command is received. If not, the drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S3401 that the demo display flag is on (S3401: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. (S3502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3501, that is, if it is off (S3501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3602). In the process of S3602, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3602 (S3602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to S3603. Also, as a result of the process of S3601, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the process proceeds to S3603.

  In the process of S3603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3603). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the process of S3603 (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 42B) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 42B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 43 to 48) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 49 to 53) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. Displays the normal image. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55) (see S3501: No in FIG. 54A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3503), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3702). If it is transfer data information (S3702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3704), and the process proceeds to step S3705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S3702 (S3702: No), the processes of S3703 and S3704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3705. In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3705: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3706).

  In the process of S3706, after an image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3706 (S3706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to S3707. Also, as a result of the processing in S3705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3705: No), the processing proceeds to S3707.

  In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3707). If the transfer start flag is on (S3707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S3708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3707: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3709). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3709: Yes), this means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3710), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3712), and the process proceeds to S3713.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3711, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3713). The determination in the process of S3713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3713 (S3713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3713 (S3713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3715), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 22 is generated (S3801). That is, in the process of S3801, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 42B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the RTC 292, the third symbol display device 81 executes a time effect that is different from the effect that is normally executed. It is configured to be possible. This time effect is performed every hour and continues for 3 minutes. Since only three minutes of one hour are executed, the player can feel novelty by executing the time effect. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In addition, since the time production is configured to be executed at predetermined intervals (every hour), the player can play a game aiming at the execution period of the time production, It is possible to make the player who wants to quit the game want to enjoy the time effect by continuing the game until the next time effect is finished. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  This time effect is configured to be executed based on an elapsed time since the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall at the same timing, the start timing and the end timing of the time effect can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the display effect executed in each pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, at the start timing of the time effect, a notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for the player. Here, the time effect is executed according to the elapsed time from the power-on. In other words, it is executed irrespective of the status of other display effects such as a change effect. Therefore, if other display effects such as a variable effect are common in the normal effect period and the time effect period, the notification image 750, the character displayed during the time effect, etc. are displayed in the third pattern, the demo image, etc. The time effect, which is one of the effects most desired to be shown to the player, may be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the remaining time until the changing effect is started is determined, and the changing effect mode is set so as not to interfere with the effect executed during the time effect according to the remaining time. Configured to select. For example, when the variation effect is started during the time effect, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right part of the third symbol display device 81, so that it is displayed in the center portion of the third symbol display device 81. The variation effect can be executed without blocking the dog character 740 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the execution time period of the time effect is reached during the fixed display of the third symbol or the execution of the demonstration effect, the displayed third symbol or demo image is deleted. It is configured. That is, in the main display area Dm, the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) can be displayed without being shielded by other images. Therefore, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the time effect that is one of the effects most desired to be shown to the player has started.

  In addition, a display effect with a higher degree of freedom can be executed as compared with a case where the size of the area in which the third symbol is displayed is simply switched between the time effect and the normal time. Temporarily, if it is configured such that the variation display and confirmation display of the third symbol is performed on the entire main display area Dm in the normal time, and the variation display and confirmation display of the third symbol is performed in the small display area 780 during the time effect period, During the performance, the third symbol or the demo image is always displayed on the small display area 780. That is, an area that cannot be used for the display effect during the time effect is generated. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the notification image 750 can be displayed in the display area including the small display area 780 (see FIG. 6B), a display with a high degree of freedom is achieved using a wider display area. Production can be performed.

  In the present embodiment, as the mode of the time effect, the dog character 740 is configured to perform various operations. However, the mode of the time effect is not limited to the mode of the present embodiment. The content of the effect may be arbitrarily determined as long as the effect is configured to be executed in a special mode different from the normal time. For example, instead of the character, the display mode of the third symbol may be changed, or a voice effect or a lamp effect different from normal may be executed. Moreover, you may comprise so that the special production different from the case where it may be a big jackpot at the time of normal time may be performed by making a big jackpot during the execution period of a time production. By providing a time effect period in which an effect in a special mode different from the normal time is executed, it is possible to suppress the effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 from becoming monotonous. Therefore, since it can suppress that a player gets tired of production, the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved. In addition, by executing the special mode effect only during the time effect period, the player can feel that the player wants to play the game during the time effect period. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, if the time effect start timing is immediately after the variation start (within 1 second after the variation start) or within 1 second before and after the variation end, the right of the main display area Dm The notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is clearly visible to the player by displaying the special symbol variation effect in a reduced scale below. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change period of the third symbol and the display period of the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) overlap, the changing third symbol is displayed in a translucent manner. Thus, the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is configured to be clearly visible to the player. However, if the execution period of the fluctuation effect and the stop display period of 1 second after the end of the fluctuation overlap with the time effect period, the special effect fluctuation effect is reduced and displayed uniformly on the lower right of the main display area Dm. It is good also as an aspect. As described above, when the third symbol is displayed in a translucent manner during the fluctuation, the third symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm in a normal manner (see FIG. 6A) for 1 second before and after the fluctuation is stopped. Thus, the dog character 740 becomes difficult to see in 1 second before and after the change stop. On the other hand, if the 3rd symbol is reduced and displayed uniformly, not only the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6 (b)) but also the dog character 740 displayed during the time effect is the 3rd symbol. Can be prevented (suppressed) from being shielded by.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a fixed display state in which the stop display of the third symbol is performed for 1 second or more (that is, there is no holding ball at the end of the previous change, and a new ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is also present. Or when the time effect start timing is reached during the demo effect, the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) is displayed by deleting the third symbol or the demo image that has been stopped. Although it is configured so that the player can clearly recognize, it is not limited to this. For example, during the time effect period, when the drawing list (see FIG. 22) is generated in the drawing process (see FIG. 56), the third symbol and the demo image being confirmed are displayed in the back of the image of one frame. You may comprise so that it may judge as a sprite which should be arrange | positioned in the back side rather than an image. As a result, during the time performance period, the 3rd symbol currently being displayed and the demo image are shielded by the back image arranged in the previous hierarchy and are not visible. The player can clearly see the effect of the dog character 740, which is the effect he wants to show. In addition, it is possible to make the 3rd symbol being displayed and the demo image invisible simply by changing the order in which the sprites are arranged, so it is necessary to prepare a demo image or the like that is difficult to see for the time effect period. There is no. Therefore, since the number of data tables can be reduced, the storage capacity of the character ROM 234 and the work RAM 233 can be reduced in the display control device 114.

  In this embodiment, it is configured to delete the third symbol in the final display state when the time effect starts, but it is configured to notify in advance that the third symbol will be deleted. Also good. Thereby, even if the third symbol is erased, it can be recognized that the erase is a normal operation, so that the player can continue the game with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the selected variation effect is changed based on whether or not one variation effect straddles the start timing of the time effect. However, there is a reserved ball, and the reservation is digested. Thus, when it is determined by prefetching when the start timing of the time effect is straddled, it may be configured to change the aspect of the effect before and after the time effect. That is, the period until the start of the time effect is determined, and the period is set as one effect period so that the notice effect is performed in a normal manner (that is, in the execution period of one or more variable effects, 1 production is set). And after the start timing of a time effect, you may comprise so that the effect of a special aspect may be set over the remaining fluctuation effects withheld at the time of the effect start. Thereby, it is possible to produce an effect over a plurality of fluctuating effects, and furthermore, the aspect of the effect can be changed before and after the start of the time effect, so a wide variety of effects can be executed. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, when the display of the stoppage of the third symbol is performed for 1 second or longer (that is, there is no holding ball at the end of the previous fluctuation, there is a new display to the first entrance 64. When the start timing of the time effect is reached (when there is no entry), the fixed display of the third symbol is erased. This prevents the display (notification image 750), which is one of the images most desired to be shown to the player, from notifying the display of the start of the time effect (the notification image 750) from being obstructed by the fixed display of the third symbol. (Suppressed). In other words, the notification image 750 can be clearly seen by the player.

  In addition, in a conventional game machine, a game machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional game machine, symbols are displayed on the display device in a variable manner, and symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the symbols, the display device displays various images such as characters and landscapes. Here, in the conventional gaming machine, a priority for displaying an image is set, for example, a symbol directly related to whether or not it is a big hit is displayed so that it can be clearly seen, and other images Is displayed in a region other than the display region where the symbol is displayed (for example, JP-A-2003-325886).

  However, in a conventional gaming machine, when a high priority image is displayed, the display area for displaying another image becomes small, and it may be difficult to visually recognize the other image. It was. In particular, when a demonstration effect is installed, other images may not be displayed because the demonstration effect is displayed on the full screen regardless of the state. That is, even if a special effect such as a time effect in the first embodiment is provided, the conventional game machine may not be able to show an image that the player wants to show to the player such as the time effect.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fixed display of the third symbol is configured to be reduced and displayed on the lower right portion (small display area 780) of the main display area Dm. That is, while the notification image 750 is clearly displayed, the confirmed display of the third symbol can be confirmed. Thereby, even if the player misses the confirmed display of the third symbol until the start timing of the time effect, the confirmed display of the third symbol can be confirmed after the start of the time effect. In addition, when the image displayed at the start timing of the time effect is a demo image, the time effect is displayed in a larger display area by hiding the demo image based on the start of the time effect. It is configured. As a result, when the display timing of the time effect comes, it is displayed according to the type of image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (determined display of the third symbol or demo image). By changing the display mode of the image and the time effect, the effect that the player wants to show can be displayed more appropriately.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment because the partial processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. This is a change. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 57, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 when it becomes a start timing of a time effect in the fixed display state of the 3rd symbol is demonstrated. FIG. 57 (a) is a diagram showing the display contents when it is five seconds before the time effect is started in the fixed display state of the third symbol. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), when it is 5 seconds before the time effect is started in a state where the third symbol is displayed in a fixed manner, “the contact time is 5 seconds before” in the small area Ds3 as in the first embodiment. Is displayed. As described above, this character is updated with the passage of time, and is configured to be “0 seconds” at the start timing of the time effect.

  FIG. 57 (b) is a diagram showing the display contents when the time effect start timing is reached with the third symbol fixedly displayed. As shown in FIG. 57 (b), at the start timing of the time effect, the third symbol that has been confirmed and displayed in the main display area Dm is reduced and displayed in the small display area 780 in the lower right part of the main display area Dm. In addition, a display for notifying the start of the time effect (notification image 750) is displayed large in the main display area Dm. That is, both the notification image 750 and the third symbol can be confirmed. Thereby, even if the player has missed the third symbol displayed in a stopped state until the start timing of the time effect, the stop symbol can be confirmed after the start of the time effect. In addition, by reducing the display of the third symbol, it is possible to prevent the notification image 750 from being blocked by the third symbol, so that the player can clearly see the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B). Can be made.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the back image change command process 2 (S2221) executed in the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this rear image change command process 2 (S2221). The rear image change command process 2 (S2221) is executed in place of the rear image change command process (see FIG. 47) in the first embodiment in the command determination process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. This process is executed when a rear image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  Of the rear image change command process 2 (see FIG. 58), the processes of S2801 to S2803 are the same as the processes of S2801 to S2803 of the rear image change command process (see FIG. 47) in the first embodiment, respectively. Is executed. If it is determined in the processing of S2803 that the back image is not a time effect (S2803: No), the processing is terminated as it is in the first embodiment. On the other hand, when it is determined that the back image is a time effect (S2803: Yes), the process proceeds to S2811.

  In the processing of S2811, it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S2811). If it is determined in the processing of S2811 that the demonstration display flag is on (S2811: Yes), the time effect start timing is displayed during display of the demonstration effect (see FIG. 7), and the rear image change command corresponding to the time effect is displayed. Means that it was received. Therefore, in this case, the value of the time counter is set to 0 (S2812), the display data table buffer 233d is cleared (S2813), and this process ends. When the display data table buffer 233d is cleared by the processing of S2813, the display image of the demonstration effect is deleted, so that the notification image 750 can be clearly seen by the player. When a rear image corresponding to the time effect is set, a demo effect for the time effect is set in the next demonstration display setting process (see FIG. 53). The demonstration effect during the time effect is such that no demo image is displayed, so that the time effect image can be displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display area that can be used to display the time effect can be further increased than the start timing of the time effect during the final display effect. Therefore, the freedom degree of the production | presentation which can be displayed in a time production can be raised more.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2811, when it is determined that the demonstration display flag is not on (that is, off) (S2811: No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is on (S2814). If it is determined that the flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2814: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2814 that the confirmed display flag is on (S2814: Yes), a confirmed display data table of a mode (see FIG. 57B) in which the third symbol is reduced and displayed. Then, the data is read from the fixed display effect table storage area in the data table storage area 233b, set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2815), and the process is terminated.

  By performing this process, when the time effect start timing comes, the third symbol that has been confirmed and displayed in the main display area Dm is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion (small display area 780) of the main display area Dm. Thereby, the notification image 750 can be clearly visually recognized by the player. In addition, even if the period from the end of the change to the start timing of the time effect is short, the third symbol is continuously displayed in the lower right part (small display area 780) of the main display area Dm, so that it is sure for the player. The stop symbol can be confirmed.

  Here, for example, the timing at which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in spite of the fact that the outreach of the aspect with high expectation is executed immediately before the time effect is started and the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot is increased. There are cases where the player is unavoidably missed. In such a case, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the time effect start timing comes before the player confirms the stop symbol, the confirmed third symbol is erased. On the other hand, there was a risk of anxiety such as "Is it true that it was a win but the win was canceled due to time production?"

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the third design that has been confirmed and displayed at the start timing of the time effect is configured to be reduced and displayed by the process of S2815. Even after the start of the game, the player can be made to confirm the stop symbol in the previous variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the third symbol, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy by missing the third symbol.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the third symbol is in the fixed display state (that is, there is no holding ball at the end of the previous fluctuation, a new entry to the first entrance 64 is made. When there is no sphere), the third design that has been confirmed and displayed in the entire main display area Dm is reduced and displayed in the small display area 780. Therefore, the notice image 750 can be clearly seen by the player, and even if the player misses the fixed display of the third symbol until the timing when the time effect starts, the third image is displayed after the time effect starts. The confirmed display of the symbol can be confirmed.

  Further, similarly to the first embodiment, in this embodiment, the demonstration image set during the time effect is not displayed at all. That is, it is set to a mode in which the rear image is displayed on the entire screen without being interrupted. Thereby, while the fixed display of the third symbol is executed (for example, 15 seconds), the third symbol stopped and displayed in the previous variation effect can be continuously displayed in the small display area 780. When the period of the demonstration effect is reached, the time effect can be executed in a wider display area. That is, the display content that is lower in priority than the time effect but relatively high in interest to the player (the fixed display of the third symbol indicating the previous special symbol lottery result) is regarded as an obstacle to the time effect. The display content (demo image) that can be displayed so that the player is not interested and is relatively uninteresting for the player is hidden, so that the degree of freedom of the time effect can be further increased. In other words, when the display timing of the time effect comes, it is displayed according to the type of image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (determined display of the third symbol or demo image). By changing the display mode of the image and the time effect, the effect desired to be shown to the player can be displayed more appropriately.

  In the present embodiment, in the fixed display state of the third symbol, the fixed display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right part (small display region 780) of the main display area Dm when the time effect start timing comes. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case where a plurality of types of time effects (for example, time effect A and time effect B) having different effect modes are provided, the position where the third symbol is reduced and displayed according to the type of time effect to be started. You may prescribe. For example, when the time effect A is started, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, and when the time effect B is started, the third symbol is reduced to the lower left part of the main control region Dm. It may be displayed. That is, in each time effect, the third symbol may be reduced and displayed at a position having the least influence on the effect executed during the time effect. Thereby, the effect image in each time effect can be visually recognized with respect to a player, without being shielded by the 3rd pattern.

  It should be noted that the position where the fixed display of the third symbol is reduced may be configured to change depending on the operation content of the frame button 228 by the player. For example, in the fixed display state of the third symbol, when the start timing of the time effect is reached, first, the fixed display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, and the frame button 228 is pressed. The reduced display position changes to the lower left part. Then, by pressing the frame button 228 again, the position of the third symbol displayed in a reduced manner changes from the lower left portion to the upper left portion, and further by pressing the frame button 228, the position of the third symbol displayed in a reduced size is displayed. Changes from the upper left part to the upper right part. Then, the third symbol may be returned to the lower right portion by operating the frame button 228 in a state where the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper right portion. As a result, it is not necessary to define the position where the 3rd symbol confirmation display is reduced in accordance with each time effect, the program capacity can be reduced, and the 3rd symbol confirmation display can be reduced according to the player's preference. Can be determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the time effect start timing is reached in the fixed display state of the third symbol, the fixed display of the third symbol is reduced to the lower right portion (small display region 780) of the main display region Dm. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be reduced and displayed based on the player pressing the frame button 228. For example, in the fixed display state of the third symbol, when the time effect start timing is reached, the fixed display of the third symbol is deleted, and the player presses the frame button 228 to You may comprise so that the fixed display of 3 symbols may be reduced-displayed in the lower right part (small display area 780) of the main display area Dm. Thereby, only when the player wants to confirm the confirmed display of the third symbol, the confirmed display can be confirmed by pressing the frame button 228. In other cases, since the fixed display of the third symbol remains erased, it is possible to concentrate on the effect executed during the time effect for the player.

  Note that, on the contrary to the above, when the player presses the frame button 228, the reduced display of the fixed display of the third symbol may be deleted. For example, in the fixed display state of the third symbol, the fixed display of the third symbol is automatically reduced to the lower right part (small display region 780) of the main display area Dm when the time effect start timing comes. When the player presses the frame button 228, the reduced display of the confirmation display may be deleted. Thus, the reduced display of the fixed display of the third symbol can be erased at any timing of the player, for example, after the player confirms the fixed display of the third symbol. Thereby, a player can be concentrated on the production performed during the time production.

  In the present embodiment, when the execution period of the demonstration effect is reached during the time effect (15 seconds have elapsed since the third symbol confirmation display is executed), the demonstration effect is erased as in the first embodiment. However, the mode of the demonstration effect executed during the time effect is not limited to this, as long as the image of the time effect can be prevented from being blocked by the demonstration effect. A demo image may be displayed. For example, the demonstration effect may be displayed only in the small display area 780 (see FIG. 8A) where the variable effect is reduced and displayed during the time effect. Further, a display area having a display area smaller than that of the small display area 780 may be provided, and a demonstration effect may be displayed in the display area. Further, for example, the demonstration effect itself may be configured not to be performed, and the confirmation display may be continuously performed. In other words, if there is no holding ball when the 3rd symbol fluctuation is stopped, the stopped symbol is reduced to the lower right part of the 3rd symbol display device 81 as long as there is no new ball entering the first entrance 64. You may comprise so that it may display in the aspect. Further, for example, a demo image may be displayed on the background of the dog character 740 during the time effect period. As a result, the effect during the time effect can be clearly displayed, and the area where the demonstration effect is normally displayed can be used as the display area for the time effect, so that the degree of freedom of the time effect can be increased. .

  Further, when the demonstration effect is executed in the time effect period, the third design stopped and displayed in the previous variation effect may be displayed on the small display area 780 in the same manner as the final display effect. As a result, when the demonstration effect and the final display effect are executed during the time effect, the same display data table may be set, so that the number of display data tables can be reduced. Therefore, the data capacity of the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the final display effect is set, the demonstration effect is continuously executed until the next variation effect is started. It is not limited to this. For example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses without starting the variation effect after the execution of the demonstration effect, the display may be switched to the final display effect. That is, it may be configured to alternately repeat the confirmed display effect and the demonstration effect until the variation effect is newly started. Specifically, when a display data table for demonstration is set and the data read from the display data table buffer 233d is END information, the display data table buffer 233d is used for a definite display effect. What is necessary is just to comprise so that a display data table may be set. That is, in the pointer update process (see FIG. 51), the data indicated by the pointer 233f is END information (see S3202 in FIG. 51), and the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is display data for demonstration effects. In the case of a table (see S3203 in FIG. 51), the same processing as S3301 to S3309 in the fixed display setting processing (see FIG. 52) may be executed instead of the processing in S3204 and S3205. Further, in the case where the fixed display data table is selected in the processing of S3303 or S3306, a data table corresponding to the previous stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol determination flag may be selected from the data table storage area 233b. . By configuring in this way, even if the pachinko machine 10 has been in a vacant state for a long time, it is possible to regularly give an opportunity to check the third symbol shown by the previous variation effect, so the pachinko machine 10 10, a player who is about to start a game can select a pachinko machine 10 on which his / her favorite stop symbol is displayed to start the game. In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the time effect period is in the final display effect, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the small display area 780, and the time effect period is in the demo effect. In such a case, since the demo image (and the third symbol) is configured not to be displayed, the time effect can be displayed in a wider display area. Therefore, the freedom degree of time production can be raised.

  Further, when the start timing of the time effect is reached during the display of the confirmed display effect, the display mode may be changed according to the number of repetitions of the confirmed display effect and the demonstration effect. For example, when the start timing of the time effect is reached during the display of the finalized display effect set first after the end of the variable effect, the third symbol is reduced and displayed on the small display area 780. . On the other hand, when the start timing of the time effect is reached during the display of the confirmed display effect set after the end of the demonstration effect, the third symbol is not displayed. Thereby, since the last stop symbol can be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds) after the end of the variation effect, the player can be displayed regardless of whether or not it is the time effect period. On the other hand, the previous stop symbol can be surely confirmed. In addition, the final display effect set after the demonstration effect is finished is an effect set after the state where the third symbol is not displayed (demonstration effect), as compared to the final display effect set after the end of the variable effect. The need to display the third symbol is reduced. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to make the image of the time effect more clearly visible by configuring so that the third symbol is not displayed.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 to 65, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment described above, in the case of the final display state in which the stop display of the third symbol is performed for one second or more (that is, there is no holding ball at the end of the previous fluctuation, a new one to the first entrance 64 is obtained. When the start timing of the time effect is reached (when there is no entry), the fixed display of the third symbol is displayed in a reduced manner. As a result, the display (notification image 750), which is one of the images most desired to be shown to the player, is notified by the start of the time effect (notification image 750) is prevented from being obstructed by the 3rd symbol confirmation display. At the same time, the player can confirm the confirmed display of the third symbol even after the start of the time effect.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the mode of the fixed display of a 3rd symbol may be set based on the remaining time until a time production is started. Specifically, if it is determined that the time effect start timing is reached in 15 seconds when the 3rd symbol confirmation display is set, the 3rd symbol confirmation display is reduced and displayed before the time effect start timing. An aspect display data table is set. Accordingly, since the fixed display of the third symbol can be set to be reduced display in advance before the start timing of the time effect, the process of displaying the notification image 750 at the start timing of the time effect. (The processing for displaying the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) and the processing for displaying the confirmed display of the third symbol in a reduced size need not be executed at the same timing). Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 at the start timing of the time effect can be reduced.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that the data in the data table storage area 223b stored in the RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is partially different, The partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed, the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is changed. A part of the processing to be executed is changed. Regarding other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and other processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the data table storage area 223b stored in the RAM 203 of the display control apparatus 114 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing data stored in the data table storage area 233b in the present embodiment. This data table storage area 233b is a storage area for storing a data table corresponding to each effect (variation effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect, final display effect, and demo effect), as in the above embodiments. Is provided. In the data table storage area 223b in the present embodiment, the configuration of the table display area for finalized display effects for storing the display data table corresponding to the finalized display effects is changed from the above-described embodiments. Since the storage area is the same as that in each of the above embodiments, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The fixed display effect table storage area of the present embodiment will be specifically described. In the storage area for finalized display effect of the present embodiment, the final display of the third symbol in the normal mode (see FIG. 57A) is performed for 5 seconds, and then the final display of the reduced mode is performed for 10 seconds. A storage area for storing “various display data tables for finalized display effects” (see S233b7a in FIG. 59), finalized display in normal mode (see FIG. 57A) for 10 seconds, and finalized display in reduced mode for 5 seconds Storage area for storing “various 10-second display data table for finalized display effect” (see S233b7b in FIG. 59) and normal mode finalized display (see FIG. 57A) for 15 seconds “15-second finalization A storage area for storing “display data tables for display effects” (see S233b7c in FIG. 59), and “display data table for determined display effects in reduced mode” for 15 seconds to display the reduced mode. Storage area (see S233b7c in FIG. 59) is provided for storing various ".

  Details of the process will be described later in the stop display selection process (see FIG. 62) and the finalized display setting process 2 (see FIG. 65). Depending on the remaining time until the time effect starts, the time effect starts. A mode in which the final display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed (a mode of the final display effect) is selected and set. Accordingly, since the fixed display of the third symbol can be set to be reduced display in advance before the start timing of the time effect, the process of displaying the notification image 750 at the start timing of the time effect. (The process of displaying the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) and the process of displaying the confirmed display of the third symbol in a reduced size need not be executed at the same timing). Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 at the start timing of the time effect can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 (S111) performed in MPU201 in the main control apparatus 110 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S111). The special symbol fluctuation process 2 (S111) is executed in place of the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 24) in each of the above-described embodiments in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Process.

  Among the special symbol variation process 2 (S111), in each process of S201 to S215, the same processing as that of S201 to S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 24) in each embodiment described above is executed. The In the process of S212, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S212: No), each process of S221 to S223 is executed before the process of S214 is performed.

  Specifically, in the process of S212, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S212: No), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S221). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c acquired in the process of S221 is greater than 0 (S222).

  In the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S222: No), a stop display command is set (S223). ), The process proceeds to S214. On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S222: Yes), the process of S223 is skipped and the process proceeds to S214.

  Here, the stop display command set by the processing of S223 is the case where the lottery result is not a big win and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0 at the end of the variation of the special symbol, that is, the fixed display state of the third symbol. Set when This stop display command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the stop display command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 31). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the stop display command, the third symbol is displayed by the start of the time effect according to the remaining time until the time effect is started by a stop display selection process (see FIG. 62) described later. The mode in which the fixed display is reduced and displayed (the mode of the fixed display effect) is selected and transmitted to the display control device 114 as a display fixed display command. When receiving the display fixed display command, the display control device 114 selects the fixed display data table based on the mode of the fixed display effect indicated by the command and sets it in the display data table buffer 223d. Thereby, before the start timing of the time effect, it can be set in advance so that the fixed display of the third symbol is reduced display.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, various processes executed in the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a command determination process (S1312) executed in the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. This command determination processing (S1312) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing.

  In this command determination process (S1312), S1521 and S1522 are executed in addition to the same processes of S1501 to S1516 as the command determination process (see FIG. 37) in each embodiment described above. Specifically, if it is determined in step S1504 that a stop type command has not been received (S1504: No), it is determined whether a stop display command has been received (S1521).

  If it is determined in step S1521 that a stop display command has been received (S1521: Yes), stop display selection processing is executed (S1522), and the process returns to the main process. This stop display selection process (S1522) is a process for determining the remaining time until the time effect is started, and setting so that the fixed display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed before the start timing of the time effect. It is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1521, when it is determined that the stop display command has not been received (S1521: No), the processing proceeds to S1507. As described above, in each process after S1507, the same processes as those after S1507 in the command determination process (see FIG. 37) in the above-described embodiments are executed.

  Next, the details of the stop display selection process (S1522) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the stop display selection process (S1522). As described above, the stop display selection process (S1522) is a process executed when it is determined that the stop display command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 61), and until the time effect is started. In accordance with the remaining time, this is a process of selecting a mode (decision display effect mode) in which the fixed display of the third symbol is reduced before the start of the time effect.

  When the stop display selection process (S1522) is executed, first, time information corresponding to the current time is acquired from the time register 352a of the RTC 292 (S3901), and the acquired time information and the input time storage area 223e are stored. The elapsed time (T) after power-on is calculated from the time information corresponding to the current power-on time (S3902).

  Next, based on the calculated elapsed time (T) and the time effect table 222b, the remaining time (t) until the next time effect is started is calculated (S3903). For example, if the elapsed time (T) is 0 hour 55:00, the next time effect starts at 60 minutes 00 seconds, so the remaining time (t) is calculated as 5 minutes.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining time (t) is 15 seconds or more (S3904). If it is determined that the remaining time (t) is 15 seconds or more (S3904: Yes), the display corresponding to the final display effect of 15 seconds is displayed. The confirmation display command for use is set (S3905), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3904, when it is determined that the remaining time (t) is not 15 seconds or longer (that is, less than 15 seconds) (S3904: No), is the remaining time (t) 10 seconds or longer? It is determined whether or not (S3906). In the process of S3906, when it is determined that the remaining time (t) is 10 seconds or more (S3906: Yes), a 10 second fixed display effect (10 seconds to 15 seconds with a normal fixed display effect) Then, a display fixed display command corresponding to a display effect in which the third symbol is reduced is set (S3907), and the process ends.

  In the process of S3906, when it is determined that the remaining time (t) is not 10 seconds or more (S3906: No), it is then determined whether the remaining time (t) is 5 seconds or more (S3908). In the process of S3908, when it is determined that the remaining time (t) is 5 seconds or more (S3908: Yes), a 5 second fixed display effect (a normal fixed display effect is performed for 5 seconds, and 5 seconds to 15 seconds). Then, a display fixed display command corresponding to a display effect in which the third symbol is reduced is set (S3909), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3908, when it is determined that the remaining time (t) is not 5 seconds or more (S3908: No), the definite display effect of the reduction mode (the effect of definitive display of the third symbol for 15 seconds) Is set for display (S3910), and the process ends.

  Here, the display fixed display command set by the processing of S3905, S3907, S3909, or S3910 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 35). In the command output process (S1302). When the display control device 114 receives the display confirmation display command, the display data table for confirmation display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d based on the mode of the confirmation display effect indicated by the display confirmation display command. The Thereby, the display data table of the aspect by which the fixed display of the 3rd symbol is reduced-displayed by the start of a time effect according to the remaining time until a time effect is started can be set.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S2102) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 in the third embodiment. This command determination process (S2102) is executed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114, and received from the sound lamp control apparatus 113 as described above. Determine which command was used.

  Among the command determination processes (S2102), the processes of S2201 to S2214 and S2216 to S2218 are the same processes as the processes of S2201 to S2214 and S2216 to S2218 in the above-described embodiments.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2214 that there is a rear image change command (S2214: Yes), the rear image change command processing 3 is executed (S2231), and the processing returns to S2201. Details of the rear image change command processing 3 (S2231) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in step S2214 that there is no rear image change command (S2214: No), it is determined whether there is a display-determined display command (S2232). If it is determined that there is a display fixed display command in the processing of S2232 (S2232: Yes), the mode of the fixed display effect is extracted from the received command (S2233), and the processing returns to S2201. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2232 that there is no display fixed display command (S2232: No), the process proceeds to step S2216, and the same processes after step S2216 as in the above-described embodiments are performed. A confirmed display data table is selected in a confirmed display setting process 2 (FIG. 3021), which will be described later, based on the form of the confirmed display effect extracted in the process of S2233.

  Next, the details of the rear image change command process 3 (S2231) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this rear image change command process 3 (S2231). The rear image change command processing 3 (S2231) is performed when the rear image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 114 in the command determination processing (see FIG. 64) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. This is a process executed instead of the rear image change command process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment.

  Of the back image change command process 3 (S2231), the processes of S2801 and S2802 are the same as the processes of S2801 and S2802 of the back image change command process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, respectively. Executed. Then, when the process of S2802 ends, the process ends and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 63). That is, in the present embodiment, the processes of S2803 and S28111 to 2815 executed in the rear image change command process 2 (see FIG. 58) of the second embodiment are omitted.

  In the present embodiment, by receiving the display confirmation display command from the sound lamp control device 113 described above, the third display before the start timing of the time effect is obtained by the confirmation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 65) described later. It is set so that the fixed display of symbols is reduced display. Therefore, the process of deleting the demonstration display (see S2813 in FIG. 58) and the process of changing the fixed display of the third symbol to the reduced display (see S2815 in FIG. 58) at the timing of changing the back image for the time effect. Since there is no need to execute this process, the present process is terminated when the process of S2802 is completed. Thereby, the processing load of the display control apparatus 114 can be reduced in the timing which changes a back image for time effects.

  Next, the confirmation display setting process 2 (S3021) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the confirmed display setting process 2 (S3021). This fixed display setting process 2 (S3021) is performed when it is determined in the display setting process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 that the time counter is 0 or less and the fixed display flag is off. This is a process executed in place of the fixed display setting process (see FIG. 52) in each embodiment described above.

  Of the fixed display setting process 2 (S3021), the processes of S3309 to S3311 execute the same processes as the processes of S3309 to S3311 of the fixed display setting process (see FIG. 52) in each embodiment described above. In this fixed display setting process 2 (S3021), each process of S3321 to S3324 is executed instead of the processes of S3301 to S3308 in the fixed display setting process (see FIG. 52). Each of these processes will be described in detail.

  In the fixed display setting process 2 (S3021), first, the mode of the fixed display effect extracted in the process of S2233 in the command determination process (see FIG. 63) described above is acquired (S3321). Then, based on the acquired display mode of the determined display effect, the corresponding display data table is selected from the table display area for fixed display effect in the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3322). For example, a confirmation for display corresponding to a confirmation display effect of 10 seconds (an effect of performing a normal confirmation display effect for 10 seconds and an effect of performing a confirmation display effect in a manner in which the third symbol is reduced from 10 seconds to 15 seconds). If it is a display command, the corresponding display data table is read from “various 10-second display data table for finalized display effects” in the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3323). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3324), and the process proceeds to S3309. In the processing of S3309 to S3311, the same processing as the processing of S3309 to S3311 of the fixed display setting processing (see FIG. 52) in each embodiment described above is executed, this processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  With this fixed display setting process 2 (S3021), the fixed display data table can be set based on the mode of the fixed display effect notified by the display fixed display command. Moreover, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the fixed display command for a display corresponding to a different aspect may be output based on the remaining time until a time production is started. Thereby, before the start timing of the time effect, it can be set in advance so that the fixed display of the third symbol is reduced display.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the fixed display of the third symbol is set, the remaining time until the time effect is started is determined, and different modes are used based on the value of the remaining time. It is configured to set a final display effect. More specifically, display data that can set a period in which the third symbol is fixedly displayed in a normal manner and a period in which the third symbol is fixedly displayed in a reduced manner in a final display effect of 15 seconds. Several types of tables are specified. Then, the fixed display data table is selected so that the period in which the third symbol is fixedly displayed in a normal manner ends before the start timing of the time effect ends, and the fixed display effect is switched to the period in which the reduced display effect is reduced. It is composed. As a result, before the notification image 750 (see FIG. 57 (b)) for notifying the start of the time effect is displayed, it is possible to reduce the 3rd symbol that is confirmed and displayed. Can prevent the notification image 750 from being shielded. Therefore, the notice image 750 which is one of the images most desired to be shown to the player can be clearly seen by the player. In this embodiment, since the timing for switching the display mode of the third symbol is defined in the final display data table, the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size before the time effect is started. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the process of displaying the notification image 750 (see FIG. 6B) and the process of displaying the fixed display of the third symbol at the same timing can be suppressed, and display at the start timing of the time effect. The processing load on the control device 114 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, in the data table storage area 233b, after the fixed display data table corresponding to the effect in which the third symbol is fixedly displayed in a normal manner, and after the third symbol is fixedly displayed for 10 seconds in the normal manner, A mode in which the 3rd symbol is reduced after the 3rd symbol is confirmed and displayed for 5 seconds in the normal mode, and a finalized display data table corresponding to the effect of executing the finalized display for 5 seconds in a mode in which the 3rd symbol is reduced. The fixed display data table corresponding to the effect for which the fixed display is executed for 10 seconds and the fixed display data table corresponding to the effect that is determined and displayed in a reduced form of the third symbol are defined. The type of table is not limited to this. The period during which the third symbol is fixedly displayed in a normal manner may be increased (for example, a fixed display data table corresponding to 3 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, 12 seconds, and 15 seconds may be provided). As a result, the period from when the 3rd symbol is displayed in a reduced size until the time effect is started can be within 3 seconds at the maximum, so that the 3rd symbol is difficult to see even though the time effect is not started. The situation can be limited to short. Conversely, the types of finalized display data tables may be reduced. For example, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect in which the third symbol is fixedly displayed in a normal manner for 10 seconds may be reduced. Thereby, the storage capacity of the data table storage area 233b and the character ROM 234 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the remaining time until the start of the time effect is determined based on the time information measured by the RTC 292 in the audio lamp control device 113, but the display control device 114 and the RTC 292 are electrically connected to display. The control device 114 may be configured to determine the remaining time directly. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 113, the remaining time until the time effect is started can be determined, and the process of setting a different display fixed display command according to the remaining time can be omitted. Processing load can be reduced.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Can be inferred.

  For example, in each of the embodiments described above, the effect displayed during the time effect is only an effect in which the dog character 740 performs various actions, but is not limited thereto. You may comprise so that the character which produces an effect may be changed according to the start time of a time effect (for example, the effect by the dog character 740, the cat character, and the monkey character is switched for every time effect). Moreover, you may comprise so that the content of production may be changed according to the start time of a time production, or a season. For example, when a time effect is started in the evening, a sunset sky may be displayed behind the character performing the effect. In addition, when the time effect is started in winter, the character performing the effect may be displayed with a winter clothes and snow may be accumulated around the character. As a result, the time effects can be diversified, so that the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game by the pachinko machine 10.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the condition for starting the demonstration effect and the confirmed display of the third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the 3rd symbol is set in the final display state, the start timing of the time effect is determined, and the set period of the final display state is selected so that the demonstration effect is started before the start timing of the time effect. May be.

  In each of the above embodiments, the audio lamp control device 113 and the RTC 292 are electrically connected, and based on the information acquired from the RTC 292, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 determines the type of effect period. Instead, the main control device 110 and the RTC 292 may be electrically connected, and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 may determine the type of effect period based on information acquired from the RTC 292. In this case, main controller 110 may include information on the type of effect period in the command output to audio lamp controller 113. Instead of the MPU of the audio lamp control device 113, the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced by causing the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to determine the type of effect period.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, the time information stored in the RAM 223 is stored in the time information storage area 352b of the RTC 292 so that the time information is retained even during the power interruption state. However, instead of this, a storage means that can hold the stored information even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state may be provided separately from the RTC 292. A specific example of the storage means is a flash memory or the like. Accordingly, the storage area of the register 352 provided in the RTC 292 can be reduced, so that the price of the RTC 292 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, when power is turned on, based on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on or off, it is stored in the time information storage area 352b of the RTC 292 as time information stored in the turn-on time storage area 223e. However, instead of this, it is determined whether to store the time information measured by the RTC 292 or not, based on signals output from hall computers connected to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 instead. The time information stored in the input time storage area 223e of the RAM 223 may be determined.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to determine whether or not the power of each connected pachinko machine 10 is turned on by the hall computer, and the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with all the power of each pachinko machine 10 turned off. When it is determined that the power has been turned on (that is, when it is determined that all the pachinko machines 10 have been turned on simultaneously), a signal indicating that the power has been turned on simultaneously is output to each of the pachinko machines 10 that have been turned on. To be configured. On the other hand, among the pachinko machines 10 connected to the hall computer, only the power source of one pachinko machine 10 is off and the power source of the other pachinko machine 10 is determined to be on. When it is determined that the power is supplied to one pachinko machine 10 that is turned off, a signal indicating that the power is supplied is output to the single pachinko machine 10 that is turned on. Configure. The time information stored in the turn-on time storage area 223e may be determined in accordance with the type of signal output from the hall computer when the power is turned on.

  In the said 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment, although it has comprised so that the aspect of a fixed display effect and a demonstration effect may be changed based on whether it is a time effect period, the change opportunity of an effect mode is time. It is not limited to directing. For example, based on switching to a different screen in the pachinko machine 10 equipped with a function for displaying a screen (game history, specifications, etc.) different from the game screen by a player's operation on a part of the third symbol display device 81. The production mode may be changed.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right, a three-time right, etc.) that increases the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, twice or three times). May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined a part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Feature A group> (Prevents island-linked production from starting when the symbol is stopped)
Display means for displaying symbols, dynamic display means for causing the display means to perform dynamic display of identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and dynamic display by the dynamic display means are predetermined identification information. In a gaming machine provided with a privilege game granting means for granting a privilege game advantageous to the player when the game ends, a specific effect different from the dynamic display of the identification information is executed on the display means based on the establishment of a specific condition A specific effect display means, a stop display means for stopping and displaying the identification information displayed after the dynamic display by the dynamic display means in the first mode, and the first of the identification information by the stop display means. When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means during the stop display in the mode, the second mode in which the identification information being stopped and displayed in the first mode is smaller in display area than the first mode. so As shown, the gaming machine is characterized in that a display mode switching means for switching a display mode of the identifying information in the stop display A1.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional game machine, symbols are displayed on the display device in a variable manner, and symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the symbols, the display device displays various images such as characters and landscapes. Here, in the conventional gaming machine, a priority for displaying an image is set, for example, a symbol directly related to whether or not it is a big hit is displayed so that it can be clearly seen, and other images Is displayed in a region other than the display region where the symbol is displayed (for example, JP-A-2003-325886).

  However, in a conventional gaming machine, when a high priority image is displayed, the display area for displaying another image becomes small, and it may be difficult to visually recognize the other image. It was. That is, regardless of whether or not the image is to be visually recognized by the player, the image becomes difficult to visually recognize, and there is a possibility that the display content cannot be set appropriately.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, a specific effect different from the dynamic display of the identification information is executed on the display unit by the specific effect display unit based on the establishment of the specific condition. The identification information displayed after the dynamic display by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in the first mode by the stop display means. And when specific production | presentation is performed by the specific production | presentation display means during the stop display in the 1st aspect of the identification information by a stop display means, the identification information currently stopped and displayed in the 1st aspect from the 1st aspect The display mode of the identification information during the stop display is switched by the display mode switching means so that the display mode is displayed in the second mode with a small display area.

  As a result, the identification information displayed at the end of the previous dynamic display is displayed in the second mode so that the player can confirm the identification information, and the specific effect is executed in a larger display area. be able to. In other words, when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display means, or when the identification information is displayed in a stop display state that is less frequently checked by the player than when the dynamic display ends. The specific production can be displayed more clearly. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be set to a suitable display content.

  In the gaming machine A1, when the dynamic display unit does not start the dynamic display of new identification information until a certain period of time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display unit, the display is stopped. A predetermined image display means for displaying a predetermined image different from the identification information instead of the identification information, and the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means during the display of the predetermined image by the predetermined image display means. And a predetermined image switching means for switching the display mode of the predetermined image to a display mode having a display area smaller than the identification information displayed in the second mode.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, if the dynamic display means does not start the dynamic display of new identification information until a certain period of time has passed since the identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display means, the identification information is replaced with the stopped display information. A predetermined image different from the identification information is displayed by the predetermined image display means. Further, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display unit while the predetermined image is displayed by the predetermined image display unit, the display mode of the predetermined image is determined by the predetermined image switching unit from the identification information displayed in the second mode. A display mode with a small display area is set.

  Thereby, when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific effect can be clearly displayed while allowing the player to visually recognize the stopped and displayed identification information. On the other hand, when the predetermined image is displayed and the identification information is not stopped, the display area of the predetermined image is set to a mode smaller than the identification information displayed in the second mode. It can make it easy to visually recognize. That is, there is an effect that the ease of visually recognizing the display image and the specific effect can be changed according to the type of the displayed display image, and the image to be visually recognized by the player can be appropriately displayed. .

  In the gaming machine A2, the predetermined image switching means hides the predetermined image when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means while the predetermined image is displayed by the predetermined image display means. A gaming machine A3 that is switched to

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display unit while the predetermined image is displayed by the predetermined image display unit, the predetermined image is not displayed by the predetermined image switching unit. It is switched to display.

  Thereby, when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific effect can be clearly displayed while allowing the player to visually recognize the stopped and displayed identification information. On the other hand, since the predetermined image is not displayed when the predetermined image is displayed and the identification information is not stopped and displayed, the specific effect can be more easily recognized. That is, there is an effect that the ease of visually recognizing the display image and the specific effect can be changed according to the type of the displayed display image, and the image to be visually recognized by the player can be appropriately displayed. .

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, there are provided time measuring means for measuring time information, and period determining means for determining whether or not it is the execution period of the specific effect based on the time information measured by the time measuring means. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the specific effect display means executes the specific effect when it is determined by the period determination means that it is the execution period of the specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are produced. That is, the time information is timed by the time measuring means, and based on the time information timed by the time measuring means, it is determined by the period determining means whether or not it is the execution period of the specific effect. Then, when it is determined by the period determining means that the execution period is a specific effect, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means.

  This allows the player to recognize the execution period of the specific effect based on the time information, so that the game can be started aiming at the execution period of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A4, the gaming machine A4 includes regulation information storage means for storing regulation information in which the display period of the specific effect is regulated in association with the timing information counted by the timing means, and the period discrimination means stores the regulation information storage A gaming machine A5, wherein it is determined whether or not it is an execution period of the specific effect based on the prescribed information stored in the means and the time information timed by the time measuring means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the regulation information storing means stores the regulation information in which the display period of the specific effect is regulated in association with the timing information measured by the clocking means. Here, based on the regulation information stored in the regulation information storage means and the timing information timed by the timing means, it is determined by the period determination means whether or not it is the execution period of the specific effect.

  Thereby, the period discrimination means can accurately discriminate whether or not it is the execution period of the specific effect only by executing a simple process of comparing the regulation information and the timing information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the processing load caused by executing the process of determining whether or not it is the execution period of the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine A5, the game machine A5 includes a remaining period specifying unit that specifies a remaining period until the display period of the specific effect starts next based on the regulation information and the timing information measured by the timing unit. The display mode switching means switches to the second mode before the display period of the specific effect is started based on the remaining period specified by the remaining period specifying means. A gaming machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the remaining period until the display period of the specific effect is started next is specified by the remaining period specifying unit based on the regulation information and the timing information. Based on the remaining period specified by the remaining period specifying unit, the display mode switching unit switches to the second mode before the display period of the specific effect is started.

  Thereby, since the display timing of a specific effect and the switching timing to a 2nd aspect can be shifted, there exists an effect that it can suppress that a processing load increases in the display timing of a specific effect. .

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the regulation information defines a first period in which the specific effect is executed and a second period in which the specific effect is not executed. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that it has a shorter period than the second period.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the following effects are produced. That is, the regulation information defines a first period that is the execution period of the specific effect and a second period in which the specific effect is not executed. The first period is configured to be shorter than the second period.

  Thereby, since the execution period of a specific effect can be limited shortly, the rarity of a specific effect can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to play a game during the execution period of the specific effect more, and there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A7, the regulation information is defined such that the first period and the second period are alternately repeated.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A7, the regulation information is regulated so that the first period and the second period are alternately repeated. The game can be surely performed in the first period to be executed. Therefore, a player who wants to play a game during a specific performance can be played for a long time, and there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A1, when the dynamic display unit does not start the dynamic display of new identification information until a certain period of time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display unit, the display is stopped. A predetermined image display means for displaying a predetermined image different from the identification information instead of the identification information, and the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means during the display of the predetermined image by the predetermined image display means. And a transmission mode setting means for switching the display mode of the predetermined image to a translucent mode.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, if the dynamic display means does not start the dynamic display of new identification information until a certain period of time has passed since the identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display means, the identification information is replaced with the stopped display information. A predetermined image different from the identification information is displayed by the predetermined image display means. Then, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display unit while the predetermined image is displayed by the predetermined image display unit, the display mode of the predetermined image is switched to the translucent mode by the transmission mode setting unit.

  Thereby, when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific effect can be clearly displayed while allowing the player to visually recognize the stopped and displayed identification information. On the other hand, when the predetermined image is displayed and the identification information is not stopped and displayed, the display area of the predetermined image is switched to a translucent mode, so that the specific effect can be more easily recognized. That is, there is an effect that the ease of visually recognizing the display image and the specific effect can be changed according to the type of the displayed display image, and the image to be visually recognized by the player can be appropriately displayed. .

  In the gaming machine A1, when the dynamic display unit does not start the dynamic display of new identification information until a certain period of time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display unit, the display is stopped. A predetermined image display means for displaying a predetermined image different from the identification information instead of the identification information, and the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means during the display of the predetermined image by the predetermined image display means. In addition, in place of the predetermined image, there is provided identification information display means for displaying the identification information stopped and displayed by the stop display means before the predetermined image is displayed in the second mode. A gaming machine A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, if the dynamic display means does not start the dynamic display of new identification information until a certain period of time has passed since the identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display means, the identification information is replaced with the stopped display information. A predetermined image different from the identification information is displayed by the predetermined image display means. Then, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means while the predetermined image is displayed by the predetermined image display means, the display is stopped by the stop display means before the predetermined image is displayed instead of the predetermined image. The identification information is displayed in the second mode by the identification information display means.

  Thereby, the same image can be displayed both when the specific effect is executed while the identification information is displayed and when the specific effect is executed while the predetermined image is displayed. That is, it is not necessary to perform a process of changing the display image according to the type of the displayed image when executing the specific effect, so that the control when the specific effect is executed can be further simplified. effective.

  In the gaming machine A1, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display unit during the stop display in the first mode of the identification information by the stop display unit, the display mode switching unit is the first mode. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the display mode of the identification information is switched so that the identification information being stopped and displayed is not displayed.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means during the stop display in the first aspect of the identification information by the stop display means, the first aspect Since the display mode of the identification information is switched by the display mode switching means so that the identification information being stopped and displayed is not displayed, there is an effect that the specific effect can be displayed more clearly.
<Others>
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional game machine, symbols are displayed on the display device in a variable manner, and symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the symbols, the display device displays various images such as characters and landscapes. Here, in the conventional gaming machine, a priority for displaying an image is set, for example, a symbol directly related to whether or not it is a big hit is displayed so that it can be clearly seen, and other images Is displayed in an area other than the display area where the symbol is displayed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).
However, in a conventional gaming machine, when a high priority image is displayed, the display area for displaying another image becomes small, and it may be difficult to visually recognize the other image. It was. That is, regardless of whether or not the image is to be visually recognized by the player, the image becomes difficult to visually recognize, and there is a possibility that the display content cannot be set appropriately.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can be set to suitable display contents.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes display means for displaying symbols, dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on establishment of a predetermined condition, A bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to the player when the dynamic display by the dynamic display means ends with predetermined identification information, and the display means based on establishment of a specific condition In the first aspect, the specific effect display means for executing a specific effect different from the dynamic display of the identification information, and the identification information displayed after the dynamic display by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in the first mode. When the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display unit during the stop display in the first mode of the identification information by the display unit and the stop display unit, the identification information being stopped and displayed in the first mode is displayed. The first As display smaller second aspect of the display area than the embodiment, and a display mode switching means for switching a display mode of the identifying information in the stop display.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in which the dynamic display means moves the new identification information until a certain period of time elapses after the identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display means. A predetermined image display means for displaying a predetermined image different from the identification information instead of the stopped-displayed identification information when the automatic display is not started, and during the display of the predetermined image by the predetermined image display means Predetermined image switching means for switching the display mode of the predetermined image to a display mode having a display area smaller than the identification information displayed in the second mode when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display unit; It has.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, wherein the predetermined image switching means displays the specific effect by the specific effect display means during the display of the predetermined image by the predetermined image display means. When executed, the predetermined image is switched so as not to be displayed.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the specific effect is executed on the basis of the time measuring means for measuring time information and the time information measured by the time measuring means. Period determining means for determining whether or not the period is a period, and the specific effect display means executes the specific effect when the period determining means determines that it is the execution period of the specific effect. is there.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, based on the establishment of the specific condition, the specific effect different from the dynamic display of the identification information is executed on the display unit by the specific effect display unit. The identification information displayed after the dynamic display by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in the first mode by the stop display means. And when specific production | presentation is performed by the specific production | presentation display means during the stop display in the 1st aspect of the identification information by a stop display means, the identification information currently stopped and displayed in the 1st aspect from the 1st aspect The display mode of the identification information during the stop display is switched by the display mode switching means so that the display mode is displayed in the second mode with a small display area.
As a result, the identification information displayed at the end of the previous dynamic display is displayed in the second mode so that the player can confirm the identification information, and the specific effect is executed in a larger display area. be able to. In other words, when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display means, or when the identification information is displayed in a stop display state that is less frequently checked by the player than when the dynamic display ends. The specific production can be displayed more clearly. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be set to a suitable display content.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, if the dynamic display means does not start the dynamic display of new identification information until a certain period of time has passed since the identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display means, the identification information is replaced with the stopped display information. A predetermined image different from the identification information is displayed by the predetermined image display means. Further, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display unit while the predetermined image is displayed by the predetermined image display unit, the display mode of the predetermined image is determined by the predetermined image switching unit from the identification information displayed in the second mode. A display mode with a small display area is set.
Thereby, when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific effect can be clearly displayed while allowing the player to visually recognize the stopped and displayed identification information. On the other hand, when the predetermined image is displayed and the identification information is not stopped, the display area of the predetermined image is set to a mode smaller than the identification information displayed in the second mode. It can make it easy to visually recognize. That is, there is an effect that the ease of visually recognizing the display image and the specific effect can be changed according to the type of the displayed display image, and the image to be visually recognized by the player can be appropriately displayed. .
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display unit while the predetermined image is displayed by the predetermined image display unit. In addition, since the predetermined image is switched so that the predetermined image is not displayed by the predetermined image switching means, when the identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific effect is clearly shown while allowing the player to visually recognize the stopped and displayed identification information. Can be displayed. On the other hand, since the predetermined image is not displayed when the predetermined image is displayed and the identification information is not stopped and displayed, the specific effect can be more easily recognized. That is, there is an effect that the ease of visually recognizing the display image and the specific effect can be changed according to the type of the displayed display image, and the image to be visually recognized by the player can be appropriately displayed. .
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the time information is timed by the time measuring means, and based on the time information timed by the time measuring means, it is determined by the period determining means whether or not it is the execution period of the specific effect. Then, when it is determined by the period determining means that the execution period is a specific effect, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect display means.
This allows the player to recognize the execution period of the specific effect based on the time information, so that the game can be started aiming at the execution period of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
292 RTC (timer)
S213 Benefits game execution unit S1404 period determination unit S1410 Display control means
S1605 mode setting unit S2205 dynamic display unit S2813 predetermined image switching unit S2815 display mode switching unit S3010 stop display unit S3404 predetermined image display unit

Claims (2)

Display means capable of displaying identification information ;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and dynamic display means for dynamically displayed in the first aspect defined the Oite the identification information in advance on the display means,
In the based on the particular identification information determined in advance in the dynamic display of the identification information is displayed stopped, the gaming machine comprising a privilege game execution means for executing an advantageous benefits the player to the player, and
Based on the establishment of predetermined specific condition, and Viewing control means Ru is displayed on the display means different specific display and dynamic display of the identification information,
And stopping display means Ru is stopped displaying stop the identification information in a dynamic display of the identification information by said dynamic display means,
If at least part of the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information overlaps with the specific period included in the display period of the specific display, the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined when the predetermined condition is satisfied The dynamic display mode in the dynamic display of the identification information that is started based on the second mode in which the specific display is easier to visually recognize than the case where the identification information is displayed in the first mode, and the second mode The display range of the specific display is wider than that of the second aspect, and the third aspect at least includes a third aspect that makes the specific display easier to visually recognize than when the identification information is displayed in the first aspect. gaming machine, wherein the mode setting means capable of setting the mode, that Ru comprising a. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is disposed at a position visible to a player.

Images